2019 savana - my.gmc.com · gmc savana owner manual (gmna-localizing-u.s./canada-12146167) - 2019 -...

SavanaOwner’s Manual

84144863 A

2019 Savana

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

19_GMC_Savana_COV_en_US_84144863A_2018JUN22.ai 1 6/14/2018 1:09:01 PM19_GMC_Savana_COV_en_US_84144863A_2018JUN22.ai 1 6/14/2018 1:09:01 PM

GMC Savana Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada-12146167) -2019 - crc - 6/18/18

Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Keys, Doors, and Windows . . . . . 25

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Instruments and Controls . . . . . . . 93

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 132

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . . 165

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Service and Maintenance . . . . . 316

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Customer Information . . . . . . . . . 334

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . 344

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360


2 Introduction

Introduction

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, GMC, theGMC Truck Emblem, and SAVANAare trademarks and/or servicemarks of General Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Company” forGMC wherever it appears in thismanual.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on the vehiclebecause of optional equipment thatwas not purchased on the vehicle,

model variants, countryspecifications, features/applicationsthat may not be available in yourregion, or changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner’s manual.

If the vehicle has the DuramaxDiesel engine, see the Duramaxdiesel supplement for additional andspecific information on this engine.

Refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm thefeatures.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle OwnersA French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

Propriétaires Canadiens

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170USA

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warning, andCautionWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 84144863 A First Printing ©2018 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


Introduction 3

{ Danger

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will resultin serious injury or death.

{ Warning

Warning indicates a hazard thatcould result in injury or death.

Caution

Caution indicates a hazard thatcould result in property or vehicledamage.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : Shown when the owner’smanual has additional instructionsor information.

* : Shown when the servicemanual has additional instructionsor information.

0 : Shown when there is moreinformation on another page —“see page.”

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. See thefeatures in this manual forinformation.

u : Air Conditioning System

G : Air Conditioning Refrigerant Oil

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

9 : Dispose of Used ComponentsProperly

P : Do Not Apply High PressureWater

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

_ : Flame/Fire Prohibited

H : Flammable

[ : Forward Collision Alert

R : Fuse Block Cover LockLocation

+ : Fuses

j : ISOFIX/LATCH System ChildRestraints


4 Introduction

Q : Keep Fuse Block CoversProperly Installed

| : Lane Change Alert

@ : Lane Departure Warning

A : Lane Keep Assist

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

X : Park Assist

~ : Pedestrian Ahead Indicator

O : Power

7 : Rear Cross Traffic Alert

I : Registered Technician

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Seat Belt Reminders

I : Side Blind Zone Alert

h : Stop/Start

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

a : Under Pressure

V : Vehicle Ahead Indicator


In Brief 5

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . 8Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 8Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . 11Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . 12Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . 14Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Vehicle FeaturesInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . 17Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . . . 18Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . 19Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 21Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . 22Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Fuel (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . 23Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24


6 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 7

1. Air Vents 0 164.

2. Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons (Out of View). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 114.

3. Turn Signal Lever. See Turnand Lane-Change Signals0 128.

Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 95.

4. Horn 0 95.

5. Hazard Warning Flashers0 128.

6. Instrument Cluster 0 101.

7. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission 0 185.

Manual Mode 0 188 (IfEquipped).

8. Climate Control Systems0 159.

9. Infotainment 0 132.

10. Power Outlets 0 98.

11. USB Port (If Equipped). SeeAuxiliary Devices 0 146.

12. Power Outlet 110/120 VoltAlternating Current. See PowerOutlets 0 98.

13. Rear Heating System 0 161 (IfEquipped).

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) 0 204 (If Equipped).

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 201 (If Equipped).

14. Passenger Airbag On-OffSwitch (If Equipped). SeeAirbag On-Off Switch 0 67.

15. Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 192.

16. Tow/Haul Mode Button (IfEquipped). See Tow/HaulMode 0 189.

17. Steering Wheel Controls 0 94(If Equipped).

18. Steering Wheel Adjustment0 94 (Out of View), (IfEquipped).

19. Parking Brake Release. SeeParking Brake 0 191.

20. Cruise Control 0 194 (IfEquipped).

Fast Idle System 0 180 (IfEquipped).

21. Parking Brake 0 191.

22. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp 0 108.

23. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 129.

Dome Lamp Override. SeeDome Lamps 0 129.

24. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 125.


8 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner’s manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemIf equipped, the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter is used toremotely lock and unlock the doorsfrom up to 60 m (197 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

RKE Transmitter with RemoteStart Shown

Q : Press to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization 0 120.

K : Press to unlock the driver door.Press K again within five secondsto unlock all remaining doors.

j : Press to unlock only the cargodoors.

L : Press and release to locatethe vehicle. PressL and hold formore than two seconds to sound the

panic alarm. PressL again tocancel the panic alarm or turn theignition on.

See Keys 0 25 and Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 27.

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped, the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Press and release Q on theRKE transmitter.

2. Immediately press and hold /for at least four seconds or untilthe turn signal lamps flash.

Start the vehicle normally afterentering.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on.

Remote start can be extended.


In Brief 9

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start 0 29.

Door Locks

Manual Door Locks

Lock and unlock the door from theoutside using the key or the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,if equipped. From the inside, slidethe manual lever on the door upor down.

See Door Locks 0 30.

Power Door Locks

If equipped, press T to lock orunlock the doors.

See Power Door Locks 0 31.

Windows

Manual Windows

Turn the hand crank on each doorto raise or lower the side doorwindows.

See Manual Windows 0 40.

Power Windows

If equipped, power windows workwhen the ignition is on, in ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 180.


10 In Brief

Using the window switch, press toopen or pull to close the window.

The windows may be temporarilydisabled if they are used repeatedlywithin a short time.

See Power Windows 0 40.

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

To adjust the manual seat:

1. Lift the bar under the frontedge of the seat cushion tounlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.

See Seat Adjustment 0 44.

Power Seats

To adjust a power seat, if available,use the controls on the front ofthe seat:

. Adjust the seat by moving thecenter knob up, down, right,or left.

. Raise and lower the front or rearof the seat cushion by movingthe right or left lever up or down.

See Power Seat Adjustment 0 44.

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on the inboardside of the seat.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatbackto make sure it is locked.


In Brief 11

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


See Reclining Seatbacks 0 45.

Seat Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to useseat belts properly:

. Seat Belts 0 50

. How to Wear Seat Belts Properly0 51

. Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 53

. Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 79

Airbag On-Off SwitchIf the instrument panel has one ofthe switches pictured in thefollowing illustrations, the vehiclehas an airbag on-off switch that youcan use to manually turn on or offthe front outboard passenger airbag.

United States

Canada

To operate the airbag on-off switch,use the vehicle key.


12 In Brief

See Airbag On-Off Switch 0 67 forimportant information.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Vehicles with manual outsidemirrors can be adjusted by movingthe mirror up and down or left andright so you can see a little of theside of the vehicle, and a clear viewof objects behind you.

If equipped with power mirrors,select each mirror by turning theknob clockwise for the passengerside mirror or counterclockwise for

the driver side mirror. Adjust themirror angle by moving the knob inthe desired direction.

Keep the selector switch in thecenter position when not adjustingeither outside mirror.

If equipped, towing mirrors can beadjusted manually for a clear viewof the objects behind you.

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash. Tofold, pull the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward toreturn it to the original position.

Interior Mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

Push the tab forward for daytimeuse and pull it rearward fornighttime use to avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind.

See Manual Rearview Mirror 0 39.

Steering WheelAdjustment


In Brief 13

If equipped with a tilt steering wheel,the lever is on the left side of thesteering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever to move thesteering wheel up or down intoa comfortable position.

2. Release the lever to lock thesteering wheel in place.

See Steering Wheel Adjustment0 94.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamps come on when anydoor is opened. They turn off afterall the doors are closed.

The instrument panel brightnessknob extends whenD is pressed.To manually turn on the domelamps, pressD then turn the knobclockwise to the farthest position. Inthis position, the dome lampsremain on whether a door is openedor closed.

E DOME OFF : This button islocated above the instrument panelbrightness knob.

Press the button in and the domelamps remain off when a door isopened. Press the button again sothat the dome lamps come on whena door is opened.

Reading Lamps

If equipped with reading lamps,press the button located next toeach lamp to turn it on or off.

The vehicle may also have readinglamps in other locations. The lampscannot be adjusted.

For more information on interiorlighting, see:

. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 129.

. Entry/Exit Lighting 0 130.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.


14 In Brief

O : Briefly turn the control to thisposition to turn the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) off or back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position only works forvehicles that are shifted into theP (Park) position.

AUTO : Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

2 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

See:

. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 125

. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)0 127

. Automatic Headlamp System0 127

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The lever is on the left side of thesteering column.

8 : Use for a single wiping cycle.

6 : Use to adjust the delay timebetween wipes. Turn the band up ordown for more frequent wipes orless frequent wipes.

d : Fast wipes.

a : Slow wipes.

9 : Use to turn the wipers off.

L : Push the paddle on top of theturn signal lever to spray washerfluid on the windshield.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 95.


In Brief 15

Climate ControlsThe vehicle's heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled with thesesystems.

Vehicles without Air Conditioning

1. Fan Control

2. Temperature Control

3. Air Delivery Mode Control


16 In Brief

Vehicles with Air Conditioning

1. Fan Control



4. Rear Window Defogger

See Climate Control Systems 0 159.See Rear Heating System 0 161,if equipped or Rear Climate ControlSystem 0 161, if equipped.

Transmission

Range Selection Mode

If equipped, Range Selection Modehelps control the vehicle'stransmission and vehicle speed

while driving downhill or towing atrailer by letting you select a desiredrange of gears.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the +/− buttons on theshift lever, to select the desiredrange of gears for currentdriving conditions.

When M (Manual Mode) is selected,the transmission will downshift anda number displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) next to theM indicating the current gear.

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode 0 189.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used. See ManualMode 0 188.


In Brief 17

Vehicle Features

Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle has a base radio it isincluded in this manual. See theseparate infotainment manual forinformation on the connected radios,audio players, phone, navigationsystem, and voice or speechrecognition. There is alsoinformation on settings anddownloadable applications (ifequipped).

Radio(s)

Radio with CD/MP3

O : Press to turn the system on andoff. Turn to increase or decrease thevolume.

BAND : Press to choose betweenFM1, FM2, AM, and SiriusXM,if equipped.

f : Turn to select radio stations.

© SEEK or ¨ SEEK : Seek or scanstations.

4 : Press to switch the displaybetween the radio station frequencyand the time. While the ignition isoff, press this button to display thetime. Press to display additional textinformation related to the current


18 In Brief

FM-RDS station or MP3 song.A choice of additional informationsuch as Channel, Song, Artist, andCAT (category) can display.Continue pressing to highlight thedesired tab, or press the softkeyunder any one of the tabs and theinformation about that tab displays.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeInfotainment 0 132.

Storing a Favorite Station

Depending on which radio thevehicle has, radio stations arestored as either favorites or presets.

For vehicles with a FAV button, amaximum of 36 stations can bestored as favorites using the sixsoftkeys below the radio stationfrequency tabs and by using theradio FAV button. Press FAV to gothrough up to six pages of favorites,each having six favorite stationsavailable per page. Each page offavorites can contain anycombination of AM stations, FMstations, and XM channels.

For more information on storing afavorite station, see Operation0 136.

Setting the Clock

1. With the radio on, press H andthe HR, MIN, MM, DD, andYYYY (hour, minute, month,day, and year) display.

2. Press the softkey under anyone of the tabs to be changed.

3. Press © SEEK or ¨ SEEK,sREV or\ FWD, or turn fclockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thetime or date.

For more information on setting theclock, see Clock 0 98.

Satellite RadioSiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.

A fee is required to receive theSiriusXM service.

For more information, refer to:

. www.siriusxm.com or call1-888-601-6296 (U.S.)

. www.siriusxm.ca or call1-877-438-9677 (Canada)

See Satellite Radio 0 139.

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle may have an auxiliaryinput on the center stack and a USBport on the instrument panel.External devices such as an iPod,laptop computer, MP3 player,or USB storage device can beconnected to the auxiliary port usinga 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input cable or theUSB port depending on the audiosystem.

See "Using the Auxiliary Input Jack"and "Using the USB Port" inAuxiliary Devices 0 146.


In Brief 19

BluetoothIf equipped with a Bluetooth system,it allows users with aBluetooth-enabled cell phone tomake and receive hands-free callsusing the vehicle’s audio systemand controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the Bluetoothsystem before it can be used in thevehicle. Not all phones will supportall functions. For more information,see www.gm.com/bluetooth andBluetooth 0 151.

Steering Wheel Controls

If equipped with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

w : Press to go to the next favoriteradio station, track on a CD,or folder on an iPod or USB device.

c /x : Press to go to theprevious favorite radio station, trackon a CD, or folder on an iPod orUSB device. Also press to reject anincoming call or end a current call.

b / g : Press to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turnthe sound on. Press and hold longerthan two seconds to interact withOnStar or Bluetooth systems,if equipped.

+ e : Press to increase volume.

− e : Press to decrease volume.

SRCE : Press to switch betweenthe radio and CD, and for equippedvehicles, the front auxiliary.

¨ : Press to seek to the next radiostation, the next track while sourcedto the CD, or to select tracks andfolders on an iPod or USB device.

See Steering Wheel Controls 0 94.


20 In Brief

Cruise Control

I : If equipped, press to turncruise control on or off. The whiteindicator comes on in the instrumentcluster when cruise control isturned on.

+RES : If there is a set speed inmemory, press briefly to resume to apreviously set speed, or press andhold to accelerate. If cruise controlis already active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET− : Press briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control,or press and hold to decelerate.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease vehicle speed.

[ : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control 0 194,if equipped.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, FCA may help avoid orreduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes. FCA provides agreen indicator,V, when a vehicleis detected ahead. This indicatordisplays amber if you follow avehicle much too closely. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead tooquickly, FCA provides a red flashingalert on the windshield and rapidlybeeps.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 201.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW may help avoidunintentional lane departures atspeeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) orgreater. LDW uses a camera sensorto detect the lane markings. TheLDW light, @, is green if a lanemarking is detected. If the vehicledeparts the lane without using a turnsignal in that direction, the light willchange to amber and flash. Inaddition, beeps will sound.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)0 204.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, SBZA will detectmoving vehicles in the next laneover in the vehicle's side blind zonearea. When this happens, the SBZAdisplay will light up in thecorresponding outside side mirrorand will flash if the turn signal is on.

See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)0 202.


In Brief 21

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, the RVC displays aview of the area behind the vehiclewhen the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).

To clean the camera lens, rinse itwith water and wipe it with a softcloth.

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC)0 198.

Park AssistIf equipped, Rear Park Assist (RPA)uses sensors on the rear bumper toassist with parking and avoidingobjects while in R (Reverse).It operates at speeds less than8 km/h (5 mph) and uses audiblebeeps to provide distance andsystem information.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

See Park Assist 0 199.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or an MP3player.

The vehicle may have twoaccessory power outlets on theinstrument panel.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

See Power Outlets 0 98.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) that limits wheel spinand the StabiliTrak/ElectronicStability Control (ESC) system thatassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.Both systems turn on automaticallyevery time the vehicle is started.


22 In Brief. To turn off TCS, press and

release g. The appropriateDriver Information Center (DIC)message will display.

. To turn off both TCS andStabiliTrak/ESC, press and holdg until the StabiliTrak/ESC OFFlightY illuminates and theappropriate DIC messagesdisplay.

. Press and release g again toturn on both systems.

StabiliTrak will automatically turnback on if the vehicle exceeds32 km/h (20 mph). TCS will remainoff until g is pressed or the ignitionis cycled off then on.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 192.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 172. Thewarning light will remain on until thetire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System0 278.

Fuel (Gasoline)

Regular Unleaded Fuel

Use only Regular 87 octane — (R+M)/2 — or higher unleadedgasoline in your vehicle. TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline isrecommended. Do not use gasolinewith an octane rating lower as it willresult in reduced performance andlower fuel economy. SeeRecommended Fuel 0 206.

Fuel (Diesel)For diesel vehicles, do not usegasoline. See “Fuel for DieselEngines” in the Duramax dieselsupplement.


In Brief 23

E85 or FlexFuel

FlexFuel Possible

Certain models are compatible withE85 fuel. See E85 or FlexFuel0 207.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Display the OIL LIFEREMAINING on the DIC. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 114.

2. Press and hold V on the DICwhile the Oil Life display isactive. The oil life will changeto 100%.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:


2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds. If thedisplay shows 100%, thesystem is reset.

See Engine Oil Life System 0 237.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible:

. Set the climate controls to thedesired temperature after theengine is started, or turn themoff when not required.

. Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

. Brake gradually and avoidabrupt stops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.


24 In Brief

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-888-881-3302

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

New GMC owners are automaticallyenrolled in the Roadside AssistanceProgram.

See Roadside Assistance Program0 338.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 25

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . 29Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . 31Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 32Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

DoorsSide Door (60/40Swing-Out) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . 36Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . . 37

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Trailer-Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 39Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . 39

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Swing-Out Windows . . . . . . . . . . . 41Enhanced Technology Glass . . . 41Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keys in theignition, and children or otherscould be caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with theignition key.


26 Keys, Doors, and Windows

{ Warning

If the key is unintentionallyrotated while the vehicle isrunning, the ignition could bemoved out of the RUN position.This could be caused by heavyitems hanging from the key ring,or by large or long items attachedto the key ring that could becontacted by the driver orsteering wheel. If the ignitionmoves out of the RUN position,the engine will shut off, brakingand steering power assist may be

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

impacted, and airbags may notdeploy. To reduce the risk ofunintentional rotation of theignition key, do not change theway the ignition key and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,if equipped, are connected to theprovided key rings.

The ignition key and key rings, andRKE transmitter, if equipped, aredesigned to work together as asystem to reduce the risk ofunintentionally moving the key outof the RUN position. The ignitionkey has a small hole to allowattachment of the provided key ring.It is important that any replacementignition keys have a small hole. Seeyour dealer if a replacement key isrequired.

The combination and size of therings that came with your keys werespecifically selected for yourvehicle. The rings are connected tothe key like two links of a chain to

reduce the risk of unintentionallymoving the key out of the RUNposition. Do not add any additionalitems to the ring attached to theignition key. Attach additional itemsonly to the second ring, and limitadded items to a few essential keysor small, light items no larger thanan RKE transmitter.



Interference from radio-frequencyidentification (RFID) tags mayprevent the key from starting thevehicle. Keep RFID tags away fromthe key when starting the vehicle.

The key is used for the ignition andall door locks.

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer or qualified locksmithcan use to make new keys. Storethis information in a safe place, notin the vehicle.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

If it becomes difficult to turn a key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program0 338.

With an active OnStar or connectedservice plan, an OnStar Advisormay remotely unlock the vehicle.See OnStar Overview 0 348.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement0 344.

If there is a decrease in the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) operatingrange:

. Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationIf equipped, the RKE transmitterfunctions work up to 60 m (197 ft)away from the vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 27.



With Remote Start, WithoutSimilar

Q : Press once to lock all doors.If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), theparking lamps flash once to indicatelocking has occurred.

The horn may chirp when Q ispressed again within five seconds.See Vehicle Personalization 0 120.

K : Press to unlock the driver door.If K is pressed again withinfive seconds, all remaining doorsunlock.

The interior lamps come on andstay on for 20 seconds or until theignition is turned on. If enabledthrough the DIC, the parking lampsflash twice to indicate unlocking hasoccurred. See VehiclePersonalization 0 120.

j : Press to unlock only the cargodoors.

/ : If equipped, press Q and thenpress and hold/ for at leastfour seconds or until the turn signallamps flash to start the engine fromoutside the vehicle using the RKEtransmitter. See Remote VehicleStart 0 29. To turn on or off, seeVehicle Personalization 0 120.

L : Press and release to initiatevehicle locator. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press and holdL for more thantwo seconds to sound the panicalarm. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turns off

when the ignition is turned on orLis pressed again. The ignition mustbe off for the panic alarm to work.

If equipped with an RKE transmitterand OnStar, refer to “Theft AlarmNotification" in OnStar Security0 350.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to the vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also beprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters no longer work once thenew transmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up tofour transmitters programmed to it.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the DICdisplays REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY.



Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object, such as a flathead screwdriver.

. Carefully insert the tool intothe notch located along theparting line of the

transmitter. Do not insertthe tool too far. Stop assoon as resistance is felt.

. Twist the tool until thetransmitter is separated.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace witha CR2032 or equivalentbattery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartThis vehicle may have a remotestart feature. This feature allows youto start the engine from outside thevehicle. It may also start thevehicle's heating or air conditioningsystems. See Climate ControlSystems 0 159.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsmay require a person using remotestart to have the vehicle in view

when doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements onremote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start featureif the vehicle is low on fuel. Thevehicle may run out of fuel.

The RKE transmitter range may beless while the vehicle is running.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 27.

/ : This button will be on the RKEtransmitter if the vehicle has remotestart.

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Press and release Q on thetransmitter.

2. Immediately press and hold /until the turn signal lampsflash. If you cannot see thelamps, press and hold/ for atleast four seconds.



When the engine starts, theparking lamps will turn on andremain on while the engine isrunning. The doors will belocked.

The engine will continue to runfor 10 minutes. After30 seconds, repeat the steps ifa 10-minute extension isdesired. Remote start can beextended only once.

After entering the vehicle during aremote start, turn the ignition on todrive the vehicle.

A maximum of two remote starts ora start with an extension areallowed between ignition cycles.

If the remote start procedure is usedagain before the first 10-minute timeframe has ended, the first10 minutes will immediately expireand the second 10-minute timeframe will start.

After the engine has been remotestarted two times or a start with anextension, the ignition must be

turned on and then off before theremote start procedure can be usedagain.

To cancel a remote start do any ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.


. Turn the ignition on and then off.

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if:

. The key is in the ignition.

. The hood is open.

. The hazard warning flashersare on.

. There is an emission controlsystem malfunction. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp0 108.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote starts or a start withan extension have already beenprovided.

To turn on or off, see VehiclePersonalization 0 120.

Door Locks

{ Warning

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When adoor is locked, the handlewill not open it. The chanceof being thrown out of thevehicle in a crash isincreased if the doors arenot locked. So, allpassengers should wearseat belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A childcan be overcome byextreme heat and can sufferpermanent injuries or evendeath from heat stroke.Always lock the vehiclewhenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking thedoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To lock the door from the inside,slide the manual lever on the doordown. To unlock the door, slide themanual lever up.

From the outside, use the key.

If the vehicle is equipped withKeyless Entry, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 27.

Power Door Locks

If equipped, press T to lock orunlock the doors.

When a door is locked, the insidedoor handle will not work.

Cargo Door RelockingIf the cargo door is open when thelock button is pressed on the dooror the RKE transmitter, all doors willlock except the cargo door. Thecargo door will lock immediatelywhen it is closed or when thedelayed locking feature functions.



Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with thepower lock switch and a door open,the doors will lock five seconds afterthe last door is closed. The hornchirps to signal that the delayedlocking feature is in use.

Pressinge or Q on the RKEtransmitter will override the delayedlocking feature and immediately lockall the doors.

This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.

This feature can be programmedusing the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See “DELAY DOORLOCK” in Vehicle Personalization0 120.

Automatic Door LocksThe vehicle may have an automaticlock/unlock feature. This feature canbe programmed using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization 0 120.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature protects you fromlocking the key in the vehicle whenthe key is in the ignition and a dooris open.

If the power lock switch is pressedwhen either the driver, passenger,or rear door is open, all the doorswill lock and then the driver door willunlock. This feature does notinclude the side cargo door.

If the vehicle has an ambulancepackage, this feature is disabled.

Safety LocksSecurity locks are located on thefront portion of the 60/40 sideswing-out door or the sidesliding door.

60/40 Swing-Out SideDoor—Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

For the 60/40 side swing-out door,move the button to the right for thedriver side door or to the left for thepassenger side door to engage thesecurity feature.

Move the button to the left for thedriver side door or to the right forthe passenger side door to returnthe door locks to normal operation.



Side Sliding Door

For the side sliding door, move thebutton up to engage the securityfeature. Move the button down toreturn the door locks to normaloperation.

Doors

Side Door (60/40Swing-Out)

To open the front portion of a 60/40 door from the outside, pull out onthe handle and open the door.

To open the front portion of a 60/40 door from the inside, pull thehandle toward you and push thedoor open.



To open the rear portion of a 60/40 door from the outside, pull thehandle on the side of the rear doorand pull the door toward you.

To close the 60/40 side doors, closethe rear door first. Then close thefront door. Check to make sure thatboth doors are completely closed.

The swing-out doors have a checkstrap assembly in the door frame tokeep the door from opening beyond90 degrees.

To open the door beyond90 degrees, close the door partially,pull the check strap toward you andthen open the door. When the dooris closed, the check strap willautomatically re-engage.

Sliding Door

To open the sliding side door fromthe outside, pull the handle towardthe rear of the vehicle and slide thedoor open.

To close the sliding side door fromthe outside, use the handle to slidethe door toward the front of thevehicle.

When the door is closed, it will beflush with the side of the body.

To open the sliding side door fromthe inside, pull the handle towardthe rear of the vehicle. Then, slidethe door toward the rear of thevehicle.

To close the sliding side door fromthe inside, grasp the handle andslide the door toward the front of thevehicle.

Make sure the door is completelyclosed before driving away.



Rear Doors

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. The doorscan be unlocked andopened while the vehicle ismoving. The chance ofbeing thrown out of thevehicle in a crash isincreased if the doors arenot locked. So, allpassengers should wearseat belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A childcan be overcome byextreme heat and can suffer

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

permanent injuries or evendeath from heat stroke.Always lock the vehiclewhenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking thedoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To open the rear doors from theoutside, pull the handle toward youto open the passenger side reardoor first.

To open the driver side rear door,pull the latch release at the insideedge of the door.

To close the rear doors, close thedriver side rear door first. Thenclose the passenger side rear door.Check to make sure both doors arecompletely closed.



Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.

Arming the Alarm System

1. Close the side door/rear doorsand the hood. Turn off thevehicle.

2. Lock the vehicle in one oftwo ways:

. Use the RKE transmitter.

. With a door open, press theinside Q.

3. After 30 seconds the alarmsystem will arm. Pressing Q onthe RKE transmitter a secondtime will bypass the 30-seconddelay and immediately arm thealarm system.

The vehicle alarm system will notarm if the doors are locked with thekey or the manual door lock.

The alarm will also be activated if apassenger door, side door, reardoor, or the hood is opened withoutfirst disarming the system. When thealarm is activated, the turn signalsflash and the horn sounds for about30 seconds. The alarm system willthen re-arm to monitor for the nextunauthorized event.

Disarming the Alarm System

To disarm the alarm system or turnoff the alarm if it has been activated:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Start the vehicle.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:

. Lock the vehicle after alloccupants have left the vehicleand all doors are closed.

. Always unlock a door with theRKE transmitter.

Unlocking the driver door with thekey will not disarm the system orturn off the alarm.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed and the horn chirpsand the lights flash three times, thealarm was activated while the alarmsystem was armed.

If the alarm system has beenactivated, and allowed to completean event (approximatelyone minute), a message will appearon the Driver Information Center(DIC) the next time the vehicle isstarted.

Theft Alarm Notification

To enable e-mail or text notification,see “Theft Alarm Notification” inOnStar Security 0 350.

Testing the Alarm

To test the alarm:

1. Lower the driver window andopen the driver door.



2. Press Q on the RKEtransmitter.

3. Close the door and wait for afew seconds.

4. Reach in through the openwindow, unlock the door withthe manual door lock, andopen the door.

This should set off the alarm.

If the alarm does not soundwhen it should but the lampsflash, check to see if the hornworks. The horn fuse may beblown. To replace the fuse, seeFuses and Circuit Breakers0 263.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement0 344.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle is equipped with thePASS-Key® III+ (PersonalizedAutomotive Security System)

theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key III+ is a passive theft deterrentsystem.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light will come on ifthere is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light comes on, the key mayhave a damaged transponder. Turnthe ignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key. If the enginestill does not start with the other key,the vehicle needs service. If thevehicle does start, the first key maybe faulty. See your dealer or alocksmith who can service thePASS-Key III+ to have a newkey made.

It is possible for the PASS-Key III+decoder to learn the transpondervalue of a new or replacement key.Up to eight keys may beprogrammed for the vehicle. Thisprocedure is for learning additionalkeys only. If all the currentlyprogrammed keys are lost or do notoperate, you must see your dealeror a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key III+ to have keys madeand programmed to the system.

See your dealer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key III+ to get anew key blank that is cut exactly asthe ignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new key:

1. Verify the new key has 1stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, alreadyprogrammed key into theignition lock cylinder and startthe engine. If the engine willnot start, see your dealer forservice.



3. After the engine has started,turn the ignition off and removethe key.

4. Insert the key to beprogrammed and turn theignition on within 10 seconds ofremoving the previous key.

The security message will turnoff once the key has beenprogrammed. It may not beapparent that the securitymessage went on due to howquickly the key is programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1–4 if additionalkeys are to be programmed.

If you lose or damage aPASS-Key III+ key, see your dealeror a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key III+ to have a newkey made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the next lane,you could hit a vehicle that isdriving next to you. Check theinside mirror or glance over yourshoulder before changing lanes.

If equipped, the lower portion of thedriver and passenger side mirror isconvex. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat. The convex mirrorcan be adjusted manually to thedriver preferred position for bettervision.

Manual MirrorsAdjust the mirrors by moving themirror up and down and left andright.

The mirrors can be manually foldedin or out.

On the lower portion of each mirroris an auxiliary convex mirror.A convex mirror's surface is curvedso you can see more from the driverseat. The auxiliary convex mirrorscan be adjusted manually bymoving the mirror.

Trailer-Tow Mirrors

Vehicles with towing mirrors can beadjusted manually for a clear viewof the objects behind you.



On the lower portion of each mirrorthere is an auxiliary convex mirrorthat can be adjusted manually toprovide an extended field of view.

The mirrors can be manually foldedin or out.

Power Mirrors

If equipped with power mirrors,select each mirror by turning theknob clockwise for the passengerside mirror or counterclockwise forthe driver side mirror. The centerposition is neutral.

Adjust the mirror angle by movingthe knob in the desired direction.The auxiliary convex mirrors canonly be adjusted manually.

Folding Mirrors

Manual Folding Mirrors

The mirrors can be folded inwardtoward the vehicle to preventdamage when going through anautomatic car wash. Push the mirroroutward to return it to the originalposition.

Side Blind Zone Alert

The vehicle may have Side BlindZone Alert. See Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) 0 202.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

1 : Press to heat the mirrors.

An indicator light in the button lightswhen the outside heated mirrors areactivated.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underClimate Control Systems 0 159.

Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind the vehicle.

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Manual Rearview MirrorPush the tab forward for daytimeuse and pull it rearward fornighttime use to avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind.

Backup Video Manual Mirror

If equipped, this manual dimmingmirror provides a camera view ofthe area behind the vehicle. Thevideo display feature comes onwhen the vehicle is shifted inR (Reverse), and turns off when thevehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse).



Troubleshooting

If the vehicle is in R (Reverse) anda blue screen is displayed in themirror and then the display shutsoff, see your dealer for service.

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC)0 198.

Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

Manual WindowsOperate the manual windows byturning the hand crank on each doorto raise or lower the side doorwindows.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. See Keys 0 25.



If equipped, power windows workwhen the ignition is on, in ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 180.

Using the window switch, press toopen or pull to close the window.

The windows may be temporarilydisabled if they are used repeatedlywithin a short time.

Express-Down

The driver window switch has anexpress-down feature that allowsthe window to be lowered without

holding the switch. Press fully andrelease the switch marked AUTO toactivate the express-down mode.This mode can be canceled at anytime by pulling up on the switch. Toopen the window part way, lightlytap the switch until the window is atthe desired position.

Swing-Out Windows

Side Swing-Out Window

To open the side door swing-outwindow, pull up on the latch at theedge of the window. Swing thewindow out and push down on thelatch to lock the window into place.

To close the window, pull the latchtoward you and push down on thelatch to lock it.

Rear Swing‐Out Windows

The vehicle also has rear swing‐outwindows. The rear swing-outwindows work the same way as theside swing‐out window, but the latchis located at the bottom edge of thewindow.

Enhanced TechnologyGlassThe vehicle may be equipped withEnhanced Technology Glass (ETG).ETG is part of the overall occupant



protection system on passenger andcrew vans. ETG may help keeppassengers sitting next to thesefixed windows from being ejectedthrough the glass in some, but notall crashes. Even with this glass,seat belts must still be worn at alltimes. For passenger and crewvans, use only ETG glass approvedfor the vehicle for replacement whendamaged.

The following table shows laminatedglass location, based on vehiclemodel and options.

Vehicle Configuration ETG Locations

Passenger Vans with five or moreseating positions

Sliding door forward window(if equipped) and rear-most sidewindows

Long Wheelbase Cargo Vans Rear-most side windows

Crew VansSliding door forward window(if equipped) and rear-most sidewindows.

Rear Windows

Rear Side Door Windows(Cargo Van Only)

{ Warning

The vehicle may have a partitionbehind the front seats or verticalmetal panels on the inside of therear side door windows. Theseare part of the occupantprotection system. Do notremove them.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing down thesun visors. You can also swing themto the side.

Visor Vanity Mirror

The vehicle may have visor vanitymirrors, with or without lamps. Liftthe mirror cover to turn the lampson, if equipped.


Seats and Restraints 43

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . 44Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Seat BeltsSeat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Seat Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 58Seat Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Replacing Seat Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . 62When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . 67Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 70

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . . . 71Replacing Airbag System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Infants and Young Children . . . . 73Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . 76Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . 77Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) . . . . 79

Replacing LATCH System PartsAfter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in theRear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in theFront Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87


44 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsOn vehicles with factory installedseats, the front seats have built-inhead restraints that are notadjustable in the outboard seatingpositions.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seat:

1. Lift the bar under the frontedge of the seat cushion tounlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.

Power Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

The power seats will work withthe ignition off. Children couldoperate the power seats and beinjured. Never leave childrenalone in the vehicle.



To adjust a power seat, if available,use the controls on the front ofthe seat:

. Move the center knob to theright or left to move the seatforward or rearward.

. Move the center knob up ordown to raise or lower the seat.

. Move the right or left lever up ordown to raise or lower the frontor rear of the seat cushion.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on the inboardside of the seat.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.


To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the seat belts cannot dotheir job.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear theseat belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Rear SeatsRemoving the Rear Seat

Disconnect the mini-latch plates forthe lap-shoulder belts on the benchseat to be removed.

1. To do this, press the tip of akey into the release hole of theseat belt buckle while pullingup on the seat belt.

2. Locate the pins.

On a three-passenger seatthere are two pins on theinboard sides of the rear seats.



Three-Passenger Seat

The left side pin has a gray capwith a black “L” marked on it.


The right side pin has ablack cap with a white “R”marked on it.

On a four-passenger seat,each half of the seat has a setof pins. The left side has a setmarked “L”, and the right sidehas a set marked “R”.

If the vehicle has floor mats,the pins are under a flap thathas been cut into the mat.

3. Pull the pin handle up todisengage the pin from theretaining clip, and then pull thepin out.

4. Repeat this procedure for theother pins.

5. Pull the seat rearward about5 cm (2 in), and then lift theseat from the floor rails.

6. Remove the seat from thevehicle.

7. For the second and third rowseats, stow the seat belt latchby attaching the clip on theseat belt latch to the trim justinside the side door.



For the last row of seats, stowthe seat belt latch plate on theclip at the window trim. Roll themini-latch into the seat beltwebbing and then hook theseat belt latch plate on the clip.

Reinstalling the Rear Seats

{ Warning

A seat that is not locked intoplace properly can move aroundin a collision or sudden stop.People in the vehicle could be

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

injured. Be sure to lock the seatinto place properly wheninstalling it.

{ Warning

A seat belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the seat belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

1. Position the seat into the openslots in both rails. Push theseat forward in the rail, hookingboth seat bases onto the pinsinside of the rails.

2. Locate the hole in the rail toinstall the locking pins at therear of the seat base. If thevehicle has floor mats, pull theflap that has been cut intothe mat.

3. Insert the locking pins into theseat base and push the seat toline up the pins with the base.

On a three-passenger seat, thepin with the black capmarked “R” must be installedon the right side and the pinwith the gray cap marked “L”must be installed on theleft side.

On a four-passenger seat, thepins marked “R” must beinstalled on the half of the seaton the right side. The pinsmarked “L” must be installed onthe half of the seat on theleft side.




4. Push the pin(s) marked “R”down until they are in theretaining clip.


5. Push the pin(s) marked “L”down until they are in theretaining clip.

6. If the vehicle has a floor mat,put the flap back to its originalposition.

7. Repeat this procedure for theother seat base.

8. Connect the mini-latch platesfor the lap-shoulder belts byinserting the latch plates intothe mini-buckles attached atthe outboard positions of thebench seat. Do not twist thebelts.

9. Check that all locking pins arelocked into place beforeoperating the vehicle.



Seat BeltsThis section describes how to useseat belts properly, and some thingsnot to do.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where aseat belt cannot be worn properly.In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingseat belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingseat belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allow

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

passengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and seat belts.

Always wear a seat belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the seat belts.See Seat Belt Reminders 0 105.

Why Seat Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the seat belts!

When you wear a seat belt, you andthe vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the seatbelts. That is why wearing seat beltsmakes such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSeat Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing aseat belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a seat belt or not. Yourchance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.



Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear seatbelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only. They work withseat belts— not instead of them.Whether or not an airbag isprovided, all occupants still haveto buckle up to get the mostprotection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing seat belts.

How to Wear Seat BeltsProperlyFollow these rules for everyone'sprotection.

There are additional things to knowabout seat belts and children,including smaller children andinfants. If a child will be riding in thevehicle, see Older Children 0 72 orInfants and Young Children 0 73.Review and follow the rules forchildren in addition to the followingrules.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing seat belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a seat belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in front ofyou (if possible).

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,

this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour seat belt properly.



Never allow the lap or shoulder beltto become loose or twisted.

Never wear the shoulder belt underboth arms or behind your back.

Always use the correct buckle foryour seating position.

Never route the lap or shoulder beltover an armrest.



Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt. If you areusing a rear seating position with adetachable seat belt and the seatbelt is not attached, see“Reinstalling the Rear Seats” underRear Seats 0 46 for instructions onreconnecting the seat belt to themini-buckle.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see“Seats” in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lockif you pull the belt across youvery quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly tounlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may beengaged. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the wayand start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If thebelt is not long enough, seeSeat Belt Extender 0 58.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the seat beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you.See “Seat belt Height Adjuster”later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.



It may be necessary to pullstitching on the seat beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position. Slidethe latch plate up the seat beltwebbing when the seat belt is not inuse. The latch plate should rest onthe stitching on the seat belt, nearthe guide loop on the side wall.

Always stow the seat belt slowly.If the seat belt webbing returnsquickly to the stowed position, the

retractor may lock and cannot bepulled out. If this happens, pull theseat belt straight out firmly to unlockthe webbing, and then release it.If the webbing is still locked in theretractor, see your dealer.

Before a door is closed, be sure theseat belt is out of the way. If a dooris slammed against a seat belt,damage can occur to both the seatbelt and the vehicle.

Seat Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a seat belt heightadjuster for the driver and frontoutboard passenger positions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe seat belt in a crash. See How toWear Seat Belts Properly 0 51.

Squeeze both sides of the releasebutton and pull outward. Then movethe height adjuster up or down tothe desired position and release thebutton.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it up ordown without squeezing the releasebutton to make sure it has lockedinto position.

Seat Belt Pretensioners

If the vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact airbags and roof-rail airbags,it also has seat belt pretensionersfor the front outboard occupants.



Although the seat belt pretensionerscannot be seen, they are part of theseat belt assembly. They can helptighten the seat belts during theearly stages of a moderate tosevere frontal, near frontal, or rearcrash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met.And, if the vehicle has roof-railairbags, seat belt pretensioners canhelp tighten the seat belts in a sidecrash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle’s seat beltsystem will need to be replaced.See Replacing Seat Belt SystemParts after a Crash 0 59.

Do not sit on the outboard seat beltwhile entering or exiting the vehicleor at any time while sitting in theseat. Sitting on the seat belt candamage the webbing and hardware.

Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides

This vehicle may have rear seat beltcomfort guides. The guides mayprovide added seat belt comfort for

older children who have outgrownbooster seats and for some adults.When installed and properlyadjusted, the comfort guidepositions the shoulder belt awayfrom the neck and head.

The comfort guides for the right rearoutboard seating positions ofthree-passenger bench seats arestored in a pocket on the side of theseatback.

Adjustable comfort guides areavailable through your dealer for theleft rear outboard seating positionsof the three-passenger bench seatsand for the outboard seatingpositions of the four-passengerbench seats. For these seatingpositions, the adjustable comfortguide attaches to a loop on theoutboard side of the seatback.



Comfort Guide Installation andRemoval (Pocket Style)

To install:

1. Locate the guide in a pocket onthe side of the seatback.

2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be behind thebelt with the plastic guide onthe front.

{ Warning

A seat belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.



4. Buckle, position, and releasethe seat belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure that the shoulder beltcrosses the shoulder. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the seat belt can beremoved from the guide. Slide theguide back into its storage pocketon the side of the seatback.

Comfort Guide Installation andRemoval (Adjustable Style)

{ Warning

A seat belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

Adjustable comfort guides areavailable through your dealer for theleft rear outboard seating positionsof the three-passenger bench seatsand for the outboard seatingpositions of the four-passengerbench seats. Instructions areincluded with the guides.

Seat Belt Use DuringPregnancySeat belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear seat belts.



A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a seatbelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making seatbelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Seat Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's seat belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a seat belt is not long enough,your dealer will order you anextender. When you go in to order it,take the heaviest coat you will wear,so the extender will be long enoughfor you. To help avoid personalinjury, do not let someone else useit, and use it only for the seat it ismade to fit. The extender has beendesigned for adults. Never use it forsecuring child restraints. For moreinformation on the proper use and fitof seat belt extenders see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckPeriodically check the seat beltreminder, seat belts, buckles, latchplates, retractors, shoulder beltheight adjusters (if equipped), andseat belt anchorages to make surethey are all in working order. Lookfor any other loose or damaged seatbelt system parts that might keep a

seat belt system from performingproperly. See your dealer to have itrepaired. Torn, frayed, or twistedseat belts may not protect you in acrash. Torn or frayed seat belts canrip apart under impact forces. If abelt is torn or frayed, have itreplaced immediately. If a belt istwisted, it may be possible tountwist by reversing the latch plateon the webbing. If the twist cannotbe corrected, ask your dealer tofix it.

Make sure the seat belt reminderlight is working. See Seat BeltReminders 0 105.

Keep seat belts clean and dry. SeeSeat Belt Care 0 58.

Seat Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

Seat belts should be properly caredfor and maintained.

Seat belt hardware should be keptdry and free of dust or debris. Asnecessary, exterior hard surfacesand seat belt webbing may be lightlycleaned with mild soap and water.



Ensure there is not excessive dustor debris in the mechanism. If dustor debris exists in the system pleasesee the dealer. Parts may need tobe replaced to ensure properfunctionality of the system.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye seat beltwebbing. It may severely weakenthe webbing. In a crash, theymight not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean andrinse seat belt webbing only withmild soap and lukewarm water.Allow the webbing to dry.

Replacing Seat BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the seat beltsystem in the vehicle. A damagedseat belt system may not properlyprotect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the seat belt systems areworking properly after a crash,have them inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofseat belts may not be necessary.But the seat belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the seatbelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the seat beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the seat belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 105.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbag:

. A frontal airbag for the driver

The vehicle may have the followingairbags:

. A frontal airbag for the frontoutboard passenger

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the front outboardpassenger

Seat-mounted side impactairbags are only available onvehicles equipped with roof-railairbags.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driveron vans with single row seating

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger on vanswith single row seating

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver onvans with two row seating

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger on vans with two rowseating

If the van is equipped with asliding door, the roof-rail airbagfor the front outboard passengeris separate from the roof-railairbag for the passenger seateddirectly behind the front outboardpassenger. If the van isequipped with a 60/40 swing-outdoor, a single roof-rail airbagcovers both seating positions.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the second and third rowpassengers seated directlybehind the driver on vans withthree or more seating rows

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thesecond and third row

passengers seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger on vans with three ormore seating rows

If the van is equipped with asliding door, the roof-rail airbagfor the front outboard passengeris separate from the roof-railairbag for the second and thirdrow passengers seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger. If the van isequipped with a 60/40 swing-outdoor, a single roof-rail airbagcovers all three seatingpositions.

Additionally:

. Vehicles that have a raised ormodified roof— such as schoolbuses, ambulances, vehicleswith adaptive equipment formobility, and recreationalvehicles—may or may not beequipped with roof-rail airbags.

. Vehicles with a GVWR above4 536 kg (10,000 lb) are notequipped with roof-rail airbags.



All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on anattached label near the deploymentopening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by seatbelts. Even though today’s airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating airbag, all airbags mustinflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your seat belt, even withairbags. Airbags are designed towork with seat belts, not replacethem. Also, airbags are notdesigned to inflate in every crash.In some crashes seat belts arethe only restraint. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? 0 64.

Wearing your seat belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe seat belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a seat beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to, anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Seat belts help keep youin position before and during acrash. Always wear a seat belt,even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle. The seat belts andthe front outboard passengerairbags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back andupright in the seat with both feeton the floor.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children 0 72 orInfants and Young Children 0 73.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 105.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

If the vehicle has a front outboardpassenger frontal airbag, it is in thepassenger side instrument panel.



Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

If the vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact airbags for the driver andfront outboard passenger, they arein the sides of the seatbacks closestto the door.


If the vehicle has a single seatingrow and it has roof-rail airbags forthe driver and front outboardpassenger, the roof-rail airbags arein the ceiling above the sidewindows.


If the vehicle has two seating rows,roof-rail airbags for the driver, frontoutboard passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.If the vehicle has three or moreseating rows, roof-rail airbags forthe driver, front outboard passenger,and second and third row outboardpassengers are in the ceiling abovethe side windows.



{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped with one ormore airbags. See Airbag System0 60. Airbags are designed to inflateif the impact exceeds the specificairbag system's deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants. The vehicle haselectronic sensors which help theairbag system determine theseverity of the impact. Deploymentthresholds can vary with specificvehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver or frontoutboard passenger head andchest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.

It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

Seat-mounted side impact airbags,if equipped, are designed to inflatein moderate to severe side crashesdepending on the location of theimpact. Seat-mounted side impactairbags are not designed to inflate infrontal impacts, near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis intended to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

The vehicle may or may not beequipped with roof-rail airbags.Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe side



crashes depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, theseroof-rail airbags are designed toinflate during a rollover. Roof-railairbags are not designed to inflate infrontal, near-frontal, or rear impacts.All roof-rail airbags will inflate wheneither side of the vehicle is struck orif the sensing system predicts thatthe vehicle is about to roll over onits side.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? 0 62.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by seat belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst, second, and third rows,if equipped. The rollover capableroof-rail airbags are designed tohelp reduce the risk of full or partialejection in rollover events, althoughno system can prevent all suchejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion is

not toward those airbags. SeeWhen Should an Airbag Inflate?0 64.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto seat belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After frontal and seat-mounted sideimpact airbags (if equipped) inflate,they quickly deflate, so quickly thatsome people may not even realizethe airbags inflated. Roof-railairbags (if equipped) may still be atleast partially inflated for some timeafter they inflate. Some componentsof the airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 62.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out of



the windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors(if equipped with power door locks),turn on the interior lamps andhazard warning flashers, and shutoff the fuel system after the airbags

inflate. The feature may alsoactivate, without airbag inflation,after an event that exceeds apredetermined threshold. Afterturning the ignition off and then onagain, the fuel system will return tonormal operation; the doors can belocked, the interior lamps can beturned off, and the hazard warningflashers can be turned off using thecontrols for those features. If any ofthese systems are damaged in thecrash they may not operate asnormal.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.

. Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash.



See Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy 0 346 and Event DataRecorders 0 346.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Airbag On-Off SwitchIf the instrument panel has one ofthe switches pictured in thefollowing illustrations, the vehiclehas an airbag on-off switch that youcan use to manually turn on or offthe front outboard passenger airbag.No other airbag is affected by theairbag on-off switch.

United States Canada

This switch should only be turned tothe OFF position if the person in thefront outboard passenger position isa member of a passenger risk groupidentified by the nationalgovernment as follows:

Infant. An infant (less than1 year old) must ride in the frontseat because:

. My vehicle has no rear seat;

. My vehicle has a rear seat toosmall to accommodate arear-facing infant seat; or


68 Seats and Restraints. The infant has a medical

condition which, according to theinfant's physician, makes itnecessary for the infant to ride inthe front seat so that the drivercan constantly monitor thechild's condition.

Child age 1 to 12. A childage 1 to 12 must ride in the frontseat because:

. My vehicle has no rear seat;

. Although children ages 1 to 12ride in the rear seat(s) wheneverpossible, children ages 1 to 12sometimes must ride in the frontbecause no space is available inthe rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or

. The child has a medicalcondition which, according to thechild's physician, makes itnecessary for the child to ride inthe front seat so that the drivercan constantly monitor thechild's condition.

Medical Condition. A passengerhas a medical condition which,according to his or her physician:

. Causes the passenger airbag topose a special risk for thepassenger; and

. Makes the potential harm fromthe passenger airbag in a crashgreater than the potential harmfrom turning off the airbag andallowing the passenger, even ifbelted, to hit the instrumentpanel or windshield in a crash.

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is turned off for aperson who is not in a risk groupidentified by the nationalgovernment, that person will nothave the extra protection of anairbag. In a crash, the airbag willnot be able to inflate and helpprotect the person sitting there.Do not turn off the front outboard

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

passenger frontal airbag unlessthe person sitting there is in a riskgroup.

United States



Canada

To turn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag, insert theignition key into the airbag on-offswitch, push in, and move theswitch to the OFF position.

The airbag off light will come on andstay on to let you know the frontoutboard passenger airbag is off.See Airbag On-Off Light 0 106. Thefront outboard passenger airbag willremain off until you turn it back onagain.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. Forexample, the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag couldinflate even though the airbagon-off switch is turned off.

To help avoid injury to yourself orothers, have the vehicle servicedright away. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 105 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

United States



Canada

To turn the front outboard passengerairbag on again, insert the ignitionkey into the airbag on-off switch,push in, and move the switch to theON position.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is now enabled, andmay inflate. See Airbag On-Off Light0 106.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in several

places around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seePublication Ordering Information0 343.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly.

The operation of the airbag systemcan also be affected by changing,including improperly repairing orreplacing, any parts of the following:

. Airbag system, including airbagmodules, front or side impactsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule, or airbag wiring

. Front seats, including stitching,seams or zippers

. Seat belts

. Steering wheel, instrumentpanel, ceiling trim, or pillargarnish trim

. Inner door seals, includingspeakers

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag modules and sensors,



sensing and diagnostic module, andairbag wiring along with the properreplacement procedures.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels 0 286 for additionalimportant information.

If the vehicle must be modifiedbecause you have a disability andhave questions about whether themodifications will affect the vehicle'sairbag system, or if you havequestions about whether the airbagsystem will be affected if the vehicleis modified for any other reason, callCustomer Assistance. SeeCustomer Assistance Offices 0 336.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 105.

Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbagmay not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag modulereplaced. For the location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 62. See your dealerfor service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot properly protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. To

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

help make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 105.



Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle’s seat belts.

The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:

. Sit all the way back on the seat.Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear seat beltcomfort guide, if available. See“Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 53.If a comfort guide is notavailable, or if the shoulder beltstill does not rest on theshoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper seat belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear seat belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Seat Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt0 53.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.



In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use seat beltsproperly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same seat belt. Theseat belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A seat belt mustbe used by only one person ata time.

{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear theseat belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes the



need, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Never leave children unattendedin a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the seatbelts.

Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided byappropriate child restraints. Neitherthe vehicle's seat belt system nor itsairbag system is designed for them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant or child should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injured

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

or killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the frontoutboard seat. Secure arear-facing child restraint in a rearseat. It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in arear seat. If you must secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go.

Child restraints are devices used torestrain, seat, or position children inthe vehicle and are sometimescalled child seats or car seats.

There are three basic types ofchild restraints:

. Forward-facing child restraints

. Rear-facing child restraints

. Belt-positioning booster seats

The proper child restraint for yourchild depends on their size, weight,and age, and also on whether thechild restraint is compatible with thevehicle in which it will be used.

For each type of child restraint,there are many different modelsavailable. When purchasing a childrestraint, be sure it is designed to beused in a motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label saying thatit meets federal motor vehicle safetystandards. The restraintmanufacturer's instructions thatcome with the restraint state theweight and height limitations for aparticular child restraint. In addition,

there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with specialneeds.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury in a crash, infants andtoddlers should be secured in arear-facing child restraint until agetwo, or until they reach themaximum height and weight limitsof their child restraint.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularseat belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatal

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

injuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Restraint

A rear-facing child restraint providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Restraint

A forward-facing child restraintprovides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

Booster Seats

A belt-positioning booster seat isused for children who haveoutgrown their forward-facing childrestraint. Boosters are designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle's seatbelt system until the child is largeenough for the vehicle seat belts tofit properly without a booster seat.See the seat belt fit test in OlderChildren 0 72.



Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle’s seat belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraints mustbe secured in vehicle seats by lapbelts or the lap belt portion of alap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCHsystem. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 79 for more information.Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPST

availability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in an appropriatechild restraint secured in a rearseating position.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.



If a child restraint is secured in thefront outboard passenger seat, andthe vehicle has a switch on theinstrument panel to manually turn offthe front outboard passenger airbag,see Airbag On-Off Switch 0 67 andSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 85 orSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Front Seat) 0 87 formore information, includingimportant safety information.

Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front. This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is sogreat if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facing

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

child restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the airbag switch hasturned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

When securing a child restraint withthe seat belts in a rear seat position,study the instructions that came withthe child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent seat belts orLATCH anchors for additionalpassengers or child restraints.Adjacent seating positions shouldnot be used if the child restraintprevents access to or interferes withthe routing of the seat belt.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.



Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the childrestraint and secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. The LATCH system isdesigned to make installation of achild restraint easier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. LATCH-compatible

rear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installedusing either the LATCH anchors orthe vehicle’s seat belts. Do not useboth the seat belts and the LATCHanchorage system to secure arear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.

Booster seats use the vehicle’s seatbelts to secure the child and thebooster seat. If the manufacturerrecommends that the booster seatbe secured with the LATCH system,this can be done as long as thebooster seat can be positionedproperly and there is no interferencewith the proper positioning of thelap-shoulder belt on the child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint,and also the instructions in thismanual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or the seatbelts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

The LATCH anchorage system canbe used until the combined weightof the child plus the child restraint is29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the seat beltalone instead of the LATCHanchorage system once thecombined weight is more than29.5 kg (65 lbs).

See Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 85or Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Front Seat)0 87.

Child restraints built after March2014 will be labeled with thespecific child weight up to which theLATCH system can be used toinstall the restraint.

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positionshave lower anchors. In this case,the seat belt must be used (with toptether where available) to securethe child restraint.See Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 85



or Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Front Seat)0 87.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) is used to securethe top of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment hook (2) on the childrestraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order toreduce the forward movement androtation of the child restraint duringdriving or in a crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a single attachmenthook (2) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.



Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Second, Third, and Fourth Rowwith Three-Passenger Seat

i : Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j : Seating positions with two loweranchors.

See the information following forinstalling a child restraint with a toptether in the second, third, andfourth row center positions.

Never install two top tethers usingthe same top tether anchor.

Front Passenger Position

i : Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

The second, third, and fourth rowwith three-passenger seats haveexposed metal lower anchors in thecrease between the seatback andthe seat cushion.

Second, Third, and Fourth Rowwith Three-PassengerSeat—Passenger Van

There are two top tether anchors inthe second, third, and fourth rowthree-passenger seats. To install achild restraint in the rear driver-sideseating positions, use anchorpoint (1). To install a child restraintin the rear passenger-side seatingpositions, use anchor point (2).To install a child restraint in the rearcenter seating positions, use anchorpoint (2). Never install two toptethers using the same top tetheranchor.



If the vehicle is equipped with afour-passenger fourth or fifth rowseat, it does not have upper orlower anchors. If a child restraint isplaced in the four-passenger fourthor fifth row seat, it must be securedusing the vehicle seat belts.See Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 85or Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Front Seat)0 87.

Front Passenger Position

There is a top tether anchor for thefront passenger position with a frontpassenger seat. The anchor is atthe rear of the seat cushion on theright front passenger seat.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a child

restraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint 0 77 for additionalinformation.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ Warning

A child could be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly attachedto the vehicle using either theLATCH anchors or the vehicleseat belt. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraintand the instructions in thismanual.



{ Warning

To reduce the risk of serious orfatal injuries during a crash, donot attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Buckle any unused seat beltsbehind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,and tighten the belt behind thechild restraint after the childrestraint has been installed.

Caution

Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s seat belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled seat belts to avoidrubbing the LATCH attachments.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

Do not fold the rear seatbackwhen the seat is occupied. Do notfold the empty rear seat with aseat belt buckled. This coulddamage the seat belt or the seat.Unbuckle and return the seat beltto its stowed position, beforefolding the seat.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 77.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe seat belts. Refer to thechild restraint manufacturerinstructions and theinstructions in this manual.



1.1. Find the lower anchorsfor the desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten thelower attachments on thechild restraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraintmanufacturer recommends thatthe top tether be attached,attach and tighten the toptether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the childrestraint instructions and thefollowing steps:

2.1. Find the top tetheranchor.

2.2. For the second, third, andfourth row withthree-passenger seatsonly, in the reardriver-side seatingpositions, use anchorpoint (1). For the rearpassenger-side seatingpositions, use anchor

point (2). For the centerseating positions, useanchor point (2). Neverinstall two top tethersusing the same top tetheranchor.

2.3. Route and tighten the toptether according to yourchild restraint instructionsand the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using asingle tether, route thetether over the seatback.

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetherover the seatback.



If the position you areusing has an integratedheadrest or head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetheraround the headrest orhead restraint.

If the position you areusing has an integratedheadrest or head restraintand you are using asingle tether, route thetether over the headrestor head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the LATCH path and attemptto move it side to side andback and forth. There shouldbe no more than 2.5 cm (1 in)of movement for properinstallation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theRear Seat)When securing a child restraint withthe seat belts in a rear seat position,study the instructions that came withthe child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 79 for how and where toinstall the child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint is securedin the vehicle using a seat belt andit uses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 79 for top tetheranchor locations.



Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint or vehicle seatposition does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the seatbelt to secure the child restraint.Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint 0 77.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle’s seat belt

through or around the childrestraint. The child restraintinstructions will show you how.


Position the release button onthe buckle, away from the childrestraint, so that the seat beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.



5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as youtighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 79.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the seat belt path andattempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle seat belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theFront Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 77.

There may be a switch on theinstrument panel that you can use toturn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag. SeeAirbag On-Off Switch 0 67 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front. This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is sogreat if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

rear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the airbag switch hasturned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

{ Warning



If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

If the child restraint uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 79 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in thisposition, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and thefollowing instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.Move the seat upward or theseatback to an upright position,



if needed, to get a tightinstallation of the childrestraint.

When the airbag off switch hasturned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag, theoff indicator in the airbag offlight should light and stay litwhen you start the vehicle. SeeAirbag On-Off Light 0 106.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle’s seat beltthrough or around the childrestraint. The child restraintinstructions will show you how.


Position the release button onthe buckle, away from the childrestraint, so that the seat beltcould be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.



6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as youtighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restraintmanufacturer recommendsusing a top tether anchor,attach the top tether to the toptether anchor. Refer to theinstructions that came with thechild restraint and to LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 79.

8. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the seat belt path andattempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle seat belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

If you turned the airbag off with theswitch, turn on the front outboardpassenger airbag when you removethe child restraint from the vehicleunless the person who will be sittingthere is a member of a passengerairbag risk group. See AirbagOn-Off Switch 0 67 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.


Storage 91

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . . 91Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

StorageCompartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in storage compartments.In a crash, these objects maycause the cover to open andcould result in injury.

Front Storage

If equipped, the front storagecompartment is at the center of theinstrument panel extension near thefloor. To open, pull up on the latch.

There may also be storagecompartments on the inside of eachfront door.


92 Storage

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Tie-Downs

If equipped, there are six cargotie-downs in the cargo area that canbe used to secure cargo.

Do not apply a total load of morethan 5 000 N (1,124 lbs of force) toa single cargo tie-down whensecuring cargo.

See Vehicle Load Limits 0 172.

{ Warning

The child restraint top tether strapmay be damaged by contact withitems in the cargo area. Your childcould be seriously injured or killedin a collision if the top tether strapis damaged. Properly secure allcargo.

{ Warning

Properly secure all cargo withropes or straps to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than theseatbacks. In a sudden stop orcollision, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury. Usesuitable ropes or straps to securecargo.

{ Warning

Never allow anyone to ride in thecargo area. It is extremelydangerous to ride in the cargoarea of a vehicle. In a collision,people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injuredor killed.

Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of the vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seatbelts. Be sure everyone in thevehicle is in a seat and using aseat belt properly.


Instruments and Controls 93

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . . 94Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . 94Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . 95Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . 105Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . 105Airbag On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . 106Charging System Light . . . . . . . 107Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . 108Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . 111Lane Departure Warning (LDW)Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . 111StabiliTrak OFF Light . . . . . . . . . 111Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . 112Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . . 112Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . 113Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 113Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . 114

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Engine Power Messages . . . . . 119Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . . 119

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 120


94 Instruments and Controls

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

For vehicles with a tilt steeringwheel, the lever is located on theleft side of the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever to move thesteering wheel up or down intoa comfortable position.

2. Release the lever to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel Controls

If equipped, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

w : Press to go to the next favoriteradio station, track on a CD,or folder on an iPod or USB device.

c /x : Press to go to theprevious favorite radio station, trackon a CD, or folder on an iPod orUSB device. Also press to reject anincoming call or end a current call.

Radio

To select preset or favorite radiostations:

Press and releasew orc /x togo to the next or previous radiostation stored as a preset orfavorite.

CD

To select tracks on a CD:

Press and releasew orc /x togo to the next or previous track.

Selecting Tracks on an iPod orUSB Device

1. Press and holdw orc /xwhile listening to a song untilthe contents of the currentfolder appear on theinfotainment display.

2. Press and releasew orc /x to scroll up or down the list,then press and holdw ,

or press ¨ to play thehighlighted track.



Navigating Folders on an iPod orUSB Device

1. Press and holdw orc /xwhile listening to a song untilthe contents of the currentfolder appear on theinfotainment display.

2. Press and holdc /x to goback to the previous folder list.

3. Press and releasew orc /x to scroll up or down the list.

. To select a folder, pressand holdw , or press ¨when the folder ishighlighted.

. To go back further in thefolder list, press and holdc /x.

b / g : Press to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turnthe sound on.

For vehicles with Bluetooth orOnStar systems, press and hold forlonger than two seconds to interact

with those systems.See Bluetooth 0 151 and OnStarOverview 0 348, if equipped.

SRCE : Press to switch betweenthe radio and CD, and for equippedvehicles, the front auxiliary.

¨ : Press to go to the next radiostation while in AM, FM,or SiriusXM, if equipped.

If equipped with a CD player orUSB port:

Press ¨ to go to the next track orchapter while sourced to the CD.

Press ¨ to select a track or a folderwhen navigating folders on an iPodor USB device.

While listening to a CD, press andhold ¨ to quickly move forwardthrough the tracks. Release to stopon the desired track.

+ e : Press to increase volume.

− e : Press to decrease volume.

HornPress the horn symbol on thesteering wheel to sound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The lever is on the left side of thesteering column.

Turn the band withN on it to selectthe wiper speed.

8 : Use for a single wipe. Hold theband onz , then release. For

several wipes, hold the band onzlonger.

6 : Use to adjust the delay timebetween wipes. Turn the band upfor more frequent wipes or down forless frequent wipes.

d : Fast wipes.



a : Slow wipes.

9 : Use to turn the wipers off.

When driving during the day and thewipers are activated, the headlampsautomatically turn on aftercompleting eight wipe cycles.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged blades shouldbe replaced.

Windshield Washer

The windshield wiper paddle is ontop of the turn signal lever.

L : Push the paddle to spraywasher fluid on the windshield. Thewipers will clear the window andthen either stop or return to thepreset speed.

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

CompassThis vehicle may have a compass inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).

Compass Zone

Your dealer will set the correct zonefor your location.

Under certain circumstances, suchas during a long distancecross-country trip or moving to anew state or province, it will benecessary to compensate forcompass variance by resetting thezone through the DIC if the zone isnot set correctly.

Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth's magnetic northand true geographic north. If thecompass is not set to the zone

where you live, the compass maygive false readings. The compassmust be set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is traveling.

To adjust for compass variance, usethe following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving.Only set it when the vehicle isin P (Park).

PressT until PRESS V TOCHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays.



2. Find the vehicle's currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.

Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.

3. Press V to scroll through andselect the appropriatevariance zone.

4. Press3 until the vehicleheading, for example, N forNorth, is displayed in the DIC.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass. See“Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as an openparking lot, where driving thevehicle in circles is not a danger.It is suggested to calibrate awayfrom tall buildings, utility wires,manhole covers, or other industrialstructures, if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass should becalibrated.

If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N for North,or the heading does not changeafter making turns, there may be astrong magnetic field interfering withthe compass. Such interferencemay be caused by a magnetic CB orcell phone antenna mount, amagnetic emergency light, magneticnote pad holder, or any othermagnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,move the magnetic item, then turnon the vehicle and calibrate thecompass.

To calibrate the compass, use thefollowing procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass zoneis set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is located.See “Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in thissection.

Do not operate any switchessuch as window, climatecontrols, seats, etc. during thecalibration procedure.

2. PressT until PRESS V TOCALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays.

3. Press V to start the compasscalibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING: DRIVE INCIRCLES. Drive the vehicle intight circles at less than 8 km/h(5 mph) to complete thecalibration. The DIC will displayCALIBRATION COMPLETE fora few seconds when the



calibration is complete. TheDIC display will then return toPRESS V TO CALIBRATECOMPASS.

Clock

Setting the Time or Date

1. With the radio on, press H andthe HR, MIN, MM, DD, andYYYY (hour, minute, month,day, and year) display.

2. Press the softkey under anyone of the tabs to be changed.Every time the softkey ispressed again, the time or thedate if selected, increasesby one.

Another way to increase thetime or date is to press ¨SEEK or\ FWD (forward).

3. To decrease, press © SEEK ors REV. Turn the f knob, onthe upper right side of theradio, to adjust the selectedsetting.

Changing the Time or Date DefaultSettings

1. With the radio on, press H andthen the softkey under theforward arrow that is currentlydisplayed on the infotainmentdisplay until the time 12H(hour) and 24H (hour), and thedate MM/DD (month and day)and DD/MM (day and month)are displayed.

2. Press the softkey under thedesired option.

3. Press H again to apply theselected default, or let thescreen time out.

Power OutletsPower Outlets 12 Volt DirectCurrent

The accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or an MP3player.

The vehicle may have twoaccessory power outlets on theinstrument panel.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

Certain power accessory plugs maynot be compatible to the accessorypower outlet and could overloadvehicle or adapter fuses. If aproblem is experienced, see yourdealer.

{ Warning

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.



Caution

Leaving electrical equipmentplugged in for an extended periodof time while the vehicle is off willdrain the battery. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum20 amp rating.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 227.

Caution

Hanging heavy equipment fromthe power outlet can causedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. The poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Power Outlet 110/120 VoltAlternating Current

This power outlet can be used toplug in electrical equipment thatuses a maximum limit of 150 watts.

The 110/120 volt power outlet is onthe instrument panel.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is on,equipment requiring less than 150watts is plugged into the outlet, andno system fault is detected.

The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition is off, or if theequipment is not fully seated intothe outlet.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 150 watts or a systemfault is detected, a protection circuitshuts off the power supply and theindicator light turns off. To reset thecircuit, unplug the item and plug itback in or turn the RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) off andthen back on. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 180.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following, and may not workproperly if they are plugged in:

. Equipment with high initial peakwattage, such ascompressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools

. Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supply,such asmicrocomputer-controlledelectric blankets and touchsensor lamps

. Medical equipment

Cigarette LighterIf equipped with a cigarette lighter,to heat, push it in all the way and letgo. When it is ready for use, it willpop back out by itself.

Do not use the lighter to plug inaccessory devices. Use the poweroutlets provided.



Caution

Holding a cigarette lighter in whileit is heating does not let thelighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.

AshtraysIf equipped with a removableashtray, it can be placed into thefront floor console cupholder. Openthe cover to use.

Caution

If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Some warning lights come on brieflywhen the engine is started toindicate they are working. Whenone of the warning lights comes onand stays on while driving, or whenone of the gauges shows there maybe a problem, check the section thatexplains what to do. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and evendangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Shown, Metric Similar



If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax diesel supplementfor more information.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the vehiclespeed in kilometers per hour (km/h)and miles per hour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 114.

Fuel Gauge

Metric

English

The fuel gauge, when the ignition ison, indicates how much fuel is left inthe vehicle fuel tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

The gauge first indicates emptybefore the vehicle is out of fuel, andthe fuel tank should berefueled soon.



Listed are four situations customersmight experience with the fuelgauge. None of these indicate aproblem with the fuel gauge:

. At the gas station, the fuel pumpshuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the fuel gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge does not go back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

Engine Oil PressureGauge

Metric

English

The oil pressure gauge shows theengine oil pressure in psi (poundsper square inch) or kPa (kilopascals)when the engine is running.

Oil pressure may vary with enginespeed, outside temperature and oilviscosity, but readings above thelow pressure zone indicate thenormal operating range.

A reading in the low pressure zonemay be caused by a dangerouslylow oil level or other problemcausing low oil pressure.



Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Checkthe oil level as soon as possible.Add oil if required, but if the oillevel is within the operating rangeand the oil pressure is still low,have the vehicle serviced. Alwaysfollow the maintenance schedulefor changing engine oil.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric

English

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

It also provides an indicator of howhard the vehicle is working. During amajority of the operation, the gaugewill read 100 °C (210 °F) or less.If the vehicle is pulling a load orgoing up hills, it is normal for thetemperature to fluctuate andapproach the 122 °C (250 °F) mark.If the gauge reaches the 125 °C(260 °F) mark, it indicates that thecooling system is working beyondits capacity.

See Engine Overheating 0 248.



Voltmeter Gauge

When the engine is not running, butthe ignition is on, this gauge showsthe battery's state of charge inDC volts.

When the engine is running, thegauge shows the condition of thecharging system. Readings betweenthe low and high warning zonesindicate the normal operating range.

Readings in the low warning zonemay occur when a large number ofelectrical accessories are operatingin the vehicle and the engine is leftat an idle for an extended period.

This condition is normal since thecharging system is not able toprovide full power at engine idle. Asengine speeds are increased, thiscondition should correct itself ashigher engine speeds allow thecharging system to create maximumpower.

The vehicle can be only driven for ashort time with the reading in eitherwarning zone. If it must be driven,turn off all unnecessaryaccessories.

Readings in either warning zoneindicate a possible problem in theelectrical system. Have the vehicleserviced as soon as possible.

Seat Belt Reminders

Seat Belt Reminder Light

There is a seat belt reminder lighton the instrument cluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir seat belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver seat belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), thepretensioners (if equipped), theairbag modules, the wiring, and thecrash sensing and diagnostic



module. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag System0 60.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also display.

Airbag On-Off LightWhen the front outboard passengerairbag is manually turned off usingthe airbag on-off switch on theinstrument panel, if equipped, theindicator light OFF or the off symbolwill come on and stay on as areminder that the airbag has beenturned off. This light will go off whenthe airbag has been turned on. SeeAirbag On-Off Switch 0 67 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

United States



Canada

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is turned off for aperson who is not in a risk groupidentified by the nationalgovernment, that person will nothave the extra protection of anairbag. In a crash, the airbag willnot be able to inflate and helpprotect the person sitting there.Do not turn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag unless

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the person sitting there is in a riskgroup identified by the nationalgovernment. See Airbag On-OffSwitch 0 67 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

{ Warning



If the word ON or the on symbol islit, it means that the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag is enabled,and may inflate. See Airbag On-OffSwitch 0 67 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Charging System Light

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to START, butthe engine is not running, as acheck to show it is working.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

The light should go out once theengine starts. If it stays on,or comes on while driving, therecould be a problem with thecharging system. A charging systemmessage in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) can also appear. This



light could indicate that there areproblems with a generator drive belt,or that there is an electricalproblem. Have it checked rightaway. If the vehicle must be driven ashort distance with the light on, turnoff accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampThis light is part of the vehicle’semission control on-boarddiagnostic system. If this light is onwhile the engine is running, amalfunction has been detected andthe vehicle may require service. Thelight should come on to show that itis working when the ignition is onand the engine is not running. SeeIgnition Positions 0 176.

Malfunctions are often indicated bythe system before any problem isnoticeable. Being aware of the lightand seeking service promptly whenit comes on may prevent damage.

Caution

If the vehicle is driven continuallywith this light on, the emissioncontrol system may not work aswell, the fuel economy may belower, and the vehicle may notrun smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Modifications to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system, or the use ofreplacement tires that do notmeet the original tirespecifications, can cause this lightto come on. This could lead to

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

costly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoaffect the vehicle’s ability to passan Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 230.

If the light is flashing : Amalfunction has been detected thatcould damage the emission controlsystem and increase vehicleemissions. Diagnosis and servicemay be required.

To help prevent damage, reducevehicle speed and avoid hardaccelerations and uphill grades.If towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauled assoon as possible.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to park. Turn the vehicleoff and wait at least 10 secondsbefore restarting the engine. If thelight is still flashing, follow the



previous guidelines and see yourdealer for service as soon aspossible.

If the light is on steady : Amalfunction has been detected.Diagnosis and service may berequired.

Check the following:

. A loose or missing fuel cap maycause the light to come on. SeeFilling the Tank 0 208. A fewdriving trips with the capproperly installed may turn thelight off.

. Poor fuel quality can causeinefficient engine operation andpoor driveability, which may goaway once the engine is warmedup. If this occurs, change thefuel brand. It may require atleast one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off. SeeRecommended Fuel 0 206.

If the light remains on, see yourdealer.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

If the vehicle requires an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test, thetest equipment will likely connect tothe vehicle's Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. Connecting devices that arenot used to perform an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test or toservice the vehicle may affectvehicle operation. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 227. Seeyour dealer if assistance is needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:

. The light is on when the engineis running.

. The light does not come onwhen the ignition is on while theengine is off.

. Critical emission control systemshave not been completelydiagnosed. If this happens, thevehicle would not be ready forinspection and might requireseveral days of routine drivingbefore the system is ready forinspection. This can happen ifthe 12-volt battery has recentlybeen replaced or run down, or ifthe vehicle has been recentlyserviced.

See your dealer if the vehicle willnot pass or cannot be made readyfor the test.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.



If the warning light comes on, therecould be a brake problem. Have thebrake system inspected right away.

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen the engine is started. If it doesnot come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn you if there isa problem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light also comes onwhen the parking brake is set. SeeParking Brake 0 191 for moreinformation. The light stays on if theparking brake does not fully release.If it stays on after the parking brakeis fully released, it means thevehicle has a brake problem.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The pedal might be harder to push,or the pedal might go closer to the

floor. It could take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle 0 305.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the light comes on while driving,stop as soon as it is safely possibleand turn off the vehicle. Then startthe engine again to reset thesystem. If the ABS light stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service.

If the ABS light is the only light on,the vehicle has regular brakes, butthe antilock brakes are notfunctioning.

If both the ABS and the brakesystem warning light are on, thevehicle's antilock brakes are notfunctioning and there is a problemwith the regular brakes. See yourdealer for service.

See Brake System Warning Light0 109.



Tow/Haul Mode Light

For vehicles with the Tow/HaulMode feature, this light comes onwhen the Tow/Haul Mode has beenactivated.

See Tow/Haul Mode 0 189.

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light

If equipped, this light comes onbriefly while starting the vehicle. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced.

This light is green if LDW is on andready to operate.

This light changes to amber andflashes to indicate that the lanemarking has been crossed withoutusing a turn signal in that direction.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)0 204.

Vehicle Ahead Indicator

If equipped, this indicator willdisplay green when a vehicle isdetected ahead and amber whenyou are following a vehicle aheadmuch too closely.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 201.

StabiliTrak OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak/Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system is turned off.If StabiliTrak/ESC is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If the StabiliTrak/ESC and TCS areoff, the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Turn on theTCS and the StabiliTrak/ESCsystems and the warning lightturns off.




Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS and potentially the StabiliTrak/ESC system have been disabled.A Driver Information Center (DIC)message may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the light is on and flashing, theTCS and/or the StabiliTrak/ESCsystem is actively working.


Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. Stop as soon as possible,and inflate the tires to the pressurevalue shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See TirePressure 0 277.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 279.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Checkthe oil level as soon as possible.Add oil if required, but if the oillevel is within the operating rangeand the oil pressure is still low,have the vehicle serviced. Alwaysfollow the maintenance schedulefor changing engine oil.



This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light

English Shown, Metric Similar

This light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition is turnedon as a check to indicate it isworking. If it does not come on,have it fixed.

The low fuel warning light comes onand a chime sounds when thevehicle is low on fuel. The light turnsoff when fuel is added to thefuel tank.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)0 114.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operation0 37.

High-Beam On Light



This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger 0 126.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes on when the cruisecontrol is set.

This light goes out when the cruisecontrol is canceled. See CruiseControl 0 194.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)This vehicle has a DIC.

All messages will appear in the DICdisplay at the bottom of theinstrument cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on. After a short delay, the DICwill display the information that waslast displayed before the enginewas turned off.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

If the vehicle has these features, theDIC also displays the compassdirection and the outside airtemperature when viewing the tripand fuel information. The compassdirection appears on the top rightcorner of the DIC display. Theoutside air temperatureautomatically appears in the bottomright corner of the DIC display.

If there is a problem with the systemthat controls the temperaturedisplay, the numbers will bereplaced with dashes. If this occurs,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons on the instrumentpanel, next to the instrument cluster.



DIC Buttons

The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicleinformation, customization, and set/reset buttons. The button functionsare detailed in the following pages.

3 : Press this button to displaythe odometer, trip odometers, fuelrange, average economy, fuel used,timer, average speed, and digitaltachometer.

T : Press this button to display theoil life, rear park assist, units, tirepressure readings for vehicles withthe Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS), engine hours, TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS)

programming for vehicles with theTPMS and without a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, andcompass zone and compasscalibration on vehicles with thisfeature.

U : Press this button to customizethe feature settings on the vehicle.See Vehicle Personalization 0 120for more information.

V : Press this button to set or resetcertain functions and to turn off oracknowledge messages on the DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 : Press this button to scrollthrough the following menu items:

Odometer

Press3 until XX km (mi)displays. This display shows thedistance the vehicle has beendriven in either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi).

Trip Odometers

Press3 until A or B displays.This display shows the currentdistance traveled in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi) sincethe last reset for each trip odometer.Both trip odometers can be used atthe same time.

Each trip odometer can be reset tozero separately by pressing V whilethe desired trip odometer isdisplayed.

The trip odometer has a featurecalled the retro-active reset. Thiscan be used to set the trip odometerto the number of kilometers (miles)driven since the ignition was lastturned on. This can be used if thetrip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature,press and hold V for at leastfour seconds. The trip odometer willdisplay the number ofkilometers (km) or miles (mi) drivensince the ignition was last turned onand the vehicle was moving. Once



the vehicle begins moving, the tripodometer will accumulate mileage.For example, if the vehicle wasdriven 8 km (5 miles) before it isstarted again, and then theretro-active reset feature isactivated, the display will show 8 km(5 miles). As the vehicle beginsmoving, the display will thenincrease to 8.1 km (5.1 miles),8.2 km (5.2 miles), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature isactivated after the vehicle is started,but before it begins moving, thedisplay will show the number ofkilometers (km) or miles (mi) thatwere driven during the last ignitioncycle.

Fuel Range

Press3 until FUEL RANGEdisplays. This display shows theapproximate number of remainingkilometers (km) or miles (mi) thevehicle can be driven withoutrefueling.

The fuel range estimate is based onan average of the fuel economyover recent driving history and the

amount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. This estimate will change ifdriving conditions change. Forexample, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway, thenumber may change even thoughthe same amount of fuel is in thefuel tank. This is because differentdriving conditions produce differentfuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fueleconomy than city driving.

If the vehicle is low on fuel, theFUEL LEVEL LOW message will bedisplayed.

Average Economy

Press3 until AVG ECONOMYdisplays. This display shows theapproximate average liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This number iscalculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.

To reset AVG ECONOMY, press andhold V. The display will returnto zero.

Fuel Used

Press3 until FUEL USEDdisplays. This display shows thenumber of liters (L) or gallons (gal)of fuel used since the last reset ofthis menu item. To reset the fuelused information, press and hold Vwhile FUEL USED is displayed.

Timer

Press3 until TIMER displays.This display can be used as a timer.

To start the timer, press V whileTIMER is displayed. The display willshow the amount of time that haspassed since the timer was lastreset, not including time the ignitionis off. Time will continue to becounted as long as the ignition ison, even if another display is beingshown on the DIC. The timer willrecord up to 99 hours, 59 minutesand 59 seconds (99:59:59) afterwhich the display will return to zero.



To stop the timer, press V brieflywhile TIMER is displayed.

To reset the timer to zero, press andhold V while TIMER is displayed.

Average Speed

Press3 until AVERAGE SPEEDdisplays. This display shows theaverage speed of the vehicle inkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value. To reset thevalue, press and hold V. Thedisplay will return to zero.

Digital Tachometer

Press3 untilTachometer ##00 RPM displays.This display shows the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (RPM).

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

T : Press this button to scrollthrough the following menu items:

Oil Life

PressT until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays. This displayshows an estimate of the oil'sremaining useful life. If you see99%OIL LIFE REMAINING on thedisplay, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains. The engineoil life system will alert you tochange the oil on a scheduleconsistent with your drivingconditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.You should change the oil as soonas possible. See Engine Oil 0 235.In addition to the engine oil lifesystem monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance isrecommended. See MaintenanceSchedule 0 318.

Remember, you must reset the OILLIFE yourself after each oil change.It will not reset itself. Also, becareful not to reset the OIL LIFEaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, see EngineOil Life System 0 237.

Side Blind Zone Alert

If the vehicle has Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA), this display allows thesystem to be turned on or off. PressT until SBZA displays. Once inthis display, press V to selectbetween ON or OFF. When theSBZA system is turned off, a DICmessage will display. See SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA) 0 202.

Park Assist

If the vehicle has the Rear ParkAssist (RPA) system, pressT untilPARK ASSIST displays. Thisdisplay allows the system to beturned on or off. Once in thisdisplay, press to select between ON



or OFF. The RPA systemautomatically turns back on aftereach vehicle start. When the RPAsystem is turned off and the vehicleis shifted out of P (Park), the DICwill display the PARK ASSIST OFFmessage as a reminder that thesystem has been turned off. SeePark Assist 0 199.

Units

PressT until UNITS displays. Thisdisplay allows you to select betweenmetric or English units ofmeasurement. Once in this display,press V to select between METRICor ENGLISH units.

Tire Pressure

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can be viewedin the DIC. The tire pressure will beshown in either kilopascals (kPa) orpounds per square inch (psi). PressT until the DIC displays FRONTTIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ##

RIGHT ##. PressT again until theDIC displays REAR TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low tire pressure condition isdetected by the system whiledriving, a message advising you tocheck the pressure in a specific tirewill appear in the display. See TirePressure 0 277.

If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with the vehicle.If this consistently occurs, see yourdealer for service.

Engine Hours

PressT until ENGINE HOURSdisplays. This display shows thetotal number of hours the enginehas run.

Relearn Tire Positions

The vehicle may have this display.To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). If the vehiclehas the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS), after rotating thetires or after replacing a tire orsensor, the system must re-learn the

tire positions. To re-learn the tirepositions, see Tire Pressure MonitorSystem 0 278.See Tire Inspection 0 282 and TireRotation 0 282.

Change Compass Zone

The vehicle may have this feature.To change the compass zonethrough the DIC, see Compass0 96.

Calibrate Compass

The vehicle may have this feature.The compass can be manuallycalibrated. To calibrate the compassthrough the DIC, see Compass0 96.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.



Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may appear one afteranother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing V. The messages thatrequire immediate action cannot becleared until that action isperformed.

All messages should be takenseriously; clearing the messagedoes not correct the problem.

If a SERVICE message appears,see your dealer.

Follow the instructions given in themessages. The system displaysmessages regarding the followingtopics:

. Service Messages

. Fluid Levels

. Vehicle Security

. Brakes

. Steering

. Ride Control Systems

. Driver Assistance Systems

. Cruise Control

. Lighting and Bulb Replacement

. Wiper/Washer Systems

. Doors and Windows

. Seat Belts

. Airbag Systems

. Engine and Transmission

. Tire Pressure

. Battery

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's propulsion power isreduced. A reduction in propulsionpower can affect the vehicle's abilityto accelerate. If this message is on,but there is no observed reductionin performance, proceed to yourdestination. The performance may

be reduced the next time the vehicleis driven. The vehicle may be drivenwhile this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, or displaysrepeatedly, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

Vehicle Speed Messages

SPEED LIMITED TOXXX KM/H (MPH)

This message shows that thevehicle speed has been limited tothe speed displayed. The limitedspeed is a protection for variouspropulsion and vehicle systems,such as lubrication, thermal,suspension, or tires.



VehiclePersonalizationThis vehicle may havecustomization capabilities that allowyou to program certain features toone preferred setting. Customizationfeatures can only be programmed toone setting on the vehicle andcannot be programmed to apreferred setting for two differentdrivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on your vehicle.Only the options available will bedisplayed on the DIC.

The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen the vehicle left the factory, butmay have been changed from theirdefault state since then.

The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.

To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.

Entering the FeatureSettings Menu

1. Turn the ignition on and placethe vehicle in P (Park).

To avoid excessive drain onthe battery, it is recommendedthat the headlamps areturned off.

2. Press U to enter the featuresettings menu.

If the menu is not available,FEATURE SETTINGSAVAILABLE IN PARK willdisplay. Before entering themenu, make sure the vehicle isin P (Park).

Feature Settings Menu Items

The following are customizationfeatures that allow you to programsettings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if alanguage other than English hasbeen set. This feature allows you tochange the language in which theDIC messages appear to English.

Press U until the PRESS V TODISPLAY IN ENGLISH screenappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to displayall DIC messages in English.

LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to select thelanguage in which the DICmessages will appear.

Press U until the LANGUAGEscreen appears on the DIC display.Press V once to access the settings

for this feature. Then press U toscroll through the following settings:

ENGLISH (default) : All messageswill appear in English.

FRANCAIS : All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL : All messages willappear in Spanish.

NO CHANGE : No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.



To select a setting, press V whilethe desired setting is displayed onthe DIC. A beep will sound once alanguage has been selected.

AUTO DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhen the doors willautomatically lock.

Press U until AUTO DOOR LOCKappears on the DIC display. PressV once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press U to scrollthrough the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default) :The doors will automatically lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

AT VEHICLE SPEED : The doorswill automatically lock when thevehicle speed is above 13 km/h(8 mph) for three seconds.


To select a setting, press V whilethe desired setting is displayed onthe DIC.

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to turn off theautomatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to select whichdoors and when the doors willautomatically unlock.

Press U until AUTO DOORUNLOCK appears on the DICdisplay. Press V once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressU to scroll through the followingsettings:

OFF : None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT : Only thedriver door will unlock when the keyis taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER IN PARK : Only the driverdoor will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).

ALL AT KEY OUT : All of the doorswill unlock when the key is takenout of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default) : All of thedoors will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).



REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen locking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when locking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 27.



Press U until REMOTE DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display.Press V once to access the settings

for this feature. Then press U toscroll through the following settings:

OFF : There will be no feedbackwhen you press Q on the RKEtransmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY : The exterior lampswill flash when you press Q on theRKE transmitter.

HORN ONLY : The horn will soundon the second press of Q on theRKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default) : Theexterior lamps will flash when youpress Q on the RKE transmitter, and

the horn will sound when Q ispressed again within five seconds ofthe previous command.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter ifthe doors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 27.

Press U until REMOTE DOORUNLOCK appears on the DICdisplay. Press V once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressU to scroll through the followingsettings:

LIGHTS OFF : The exterior lampswill not flash when you press K onthe RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default) : The exteriorlamps will flash when you press Kon the RKE transmitter.



DELAY DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not the locking of thedoors will be delayed. When lockingthe doors with the power door lockswitch and a door is open, thisfeature will delay locking the doorsuntil five seconds after the last dooris closed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use. The key must beout of the ignition for this feature towork. You can temporarily overridedelayed locking by pressing thepower door lock switch twice or Qon the RKE transmitter twice. SeeDelayed Locking 0 32.



Press U until DELAY DOOR LOCKappears on the DIC display. PressV once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press U to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF : There will be no delayedlocking of the vehicle's doors.

ON (default) : The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor is closed.



EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to select theamount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on when itis dark enough outside. Thishappens after the key is turned fromon to off.

Press U until EXIT LIGHTINGappears on the DIC display. PressV once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press U to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF : The exterior lamps will notturn on.

10 SECONDS (default) : Theexterior lamps will stay on for10 seconds.

1MINUTE : The exterior lamps willstay on for one minute.

2MINUTES : The exterior lamps willstay on for twominutes.



CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select thevolume level of the chime.

Press U until CHIME VOLUMEappears on the DIC display. PressV once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press U to scrollthrough the following settings:

NORMAL : The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.

LOUD : The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stay at thelast known setting.


FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features back totheir factory default settings.



Press U until FACTORY SETTINGSappears on the DIC display. PressV once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press U to scrollthrough the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default) : Thecustomization features will be set totheir factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE : Thecustomization features will not beset to their factory default settings.


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit thefeature settings menu.

Press U until FEATURE SETTINGS

PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the

DIC display. Press V once to exitthe menu.

If you do not exit, pressing U willreturn you to the beginning of thefeature settings menu.

Exiting the FeatureSettings Menu

The feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:

. The vehicle is no longer on.

. The3 orT DIC buttons arepressed.

. The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

. A 40–second time period haselapsed with no selection made.


Lighting 125

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . 125Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 128Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Battery Load Management . . . 130Battery Power Protection . . . . . 131Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

There are four positions:

O : Briefly turn the control to thisposition to turn the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) off or back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position only works forvehicles that are shifted into theP (Park) position.


126 Lighting

AUTO : Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

2 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

If the headlamps are turned onwhile the vehicle is on, theheadlamps turn off automatically10 minutes after the ignition isturned off. If the headlamps areturned on while the vehicle is off,the headlamps will continue to stayon. To prevent the battery frombeing drained, turn the control to theO position.

A warning chime sounds if the driverdoor is opened while the ignitionswitch is off and the headlampsare on.

To change the headlamps from lowbeam to high beam, pull the turnsignal lever all the way toward you.Then release it.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderIf a door is open, a reminder chimesounds when the headlamps orparking lamps are manually turnedon and the key is out of the ignition.To turn off the chime, turn theheadlamp switch to O or AUTO andthen back on, or close and re-openthe door. In the auto mode, theheadlamps turn off once the ignitionis off or may remain on until theheadlamp delay ends, if enabled inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See “Exit Lighting” under VehiclePersonalization 0 120.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 : Pull the turn signal lever allthe way toward you to change theheadlamps from low to high beam.Then release it.

Pull the turn signal lever all the waytoward you again and release it tochange the headlamps back tolow beam.

This instrument cluster light comeson when the high-beam headlampsare on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature is used to signal to thevehicle ahead that you wantto pass.

If the headlamps are off or in thelow‐beam position, pull the turnsignal lever toward you tomomentarily switch to high beams.

Release the lever to turn thehigh-beam headlamps off.


Lighting 127

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of the vehicle duringthe day. Fully functional DRL arerequired on all vehicles first sold inCanada.

The DRL system comes on indaylight when the followingconditions are met:

. The ignition is on.

. The exterior lamp control is inthe AUTO position.

. The shift lever is not in P (Park).

. The light sensor determines it isdaytime.

When the DRL are on, the taillamps,sidemarker, instrument panel lights,and other lamps will not be on.

The automatic headlamp systemautomatically switches from DRL tothe headlamps depending on thedarkness of the surroundings.

To turn off the DRL, turn the exteriorlamp control to O and then releaseit. For vehicles first sold in Canada,the DRL can only be turned offwhen the vehicle is parked.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside andthe headlamp switch is in AUTO,the automatic headlamp systemturns on the headlamps, along withthe taillamps, sidemarker lamps,parking lamps, and the instrumentpanel lights. The radio lights willalso be dim.

To turn off the automatic headlampsystem, turn the exterior lampcontrol to the off position and thenrelease. For vehicles first sold inCanada, the transmission must bein the P (Park) position, before theautomatic headlamp system can beturned off.

The vehicle has a light sensor onthe top of the instrument panel. Donot cover the sensor; otherwise thesystem will come on whenever theignition is on.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

There is a delay in the transitionbetween the daytime and nighttimeoperation of the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) and the automaticheadlamp system so that drivingunder bridges or bright overheadstreet lights does not affect thesystem. The DRL and automaticheadlamp system are only affectedwhen the light sensor sees achange in lighting lasting longerthan the delay.


128 Lighting

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately.Once the vehicle leaves the garage,it takes approximately 30 secondsfor the automatic headlamp systemto change to DRL if it is lightoutside. During that delay, theinstrument cluster may not be asbright as usual. Make sure theinstrument panel brightness controlis in the full bright position. SeeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 129.

To idle the vehicle with theautomatic headlamp system off, turnthe control off.

The headlamps will also stay onafter exiting the vehicle. This featuremay be programmable. See VehiclePersonalization 0 120.

If the feature is not programmable,exit lighting is automatic. When it isdark enough outside, the exteriorlamps remain on for 30 secondsafter the ignition is turned off.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers arenot operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control toPor; to disable this feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| : Press this button to make thefront and rear turn signal lampsflash on and off. This warns othersthat you are having trouble. Pressagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashersare on, the vehicle's turn signals willnot work.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

G : An arrow on the instrumentcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever allthe way up or down.

To signal a lane change, raise orlower the lever until the arrow startsto flash. The turn signalautomatically flashes three times


Lighting 129

and if the Tow/Haul Mode is active itflashes six times. Holding the turnsignal lever for more thanone second causes the turn signalsto flash continually until the lever isreleased.

The lever returns to its startingposition when released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out.

Have any burned out bulbsreplaced. If a bulb is not burned out,check the fuse. See Fuses andCircuit Breakers 0 263.

Turn Signal On Chime

If the turn signal is left on for morethan 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chimesounds at each flash of the turnsignal and the message TURNSIGNAL ON also appears in theDriver Information Center (DIC). Toturn off the chime and message,move the turn signal lever to the offposition.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlThe knob for this feature is to theleft of the steering column.

D : Push the knob to extend andthen turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to brighten or dimthe instrument panel lights and theradio display. This only works if theheadlamps or parking lamps are on.

Dome LampsThe dome lamps come on when anydoor is opened. They turn off afterall the doors are closed.

The instrument panel brightnessknob extends whenD is pressed.To manually turn on the domelamps, pressD then turn the knobclockwise to the farthest position. Inthis position, the dome lampsremain on whether a door is openedor closed.

Dome Lamp Override


130 Lighting

The dome lamp override sets thedome lamps to remain off or comeon automatically when a door isopened.

E DOME OFF : Press this buttonin and the dome lamps remain offwhen a door is opened. Press thebutton again to return it to theextended position so that the domelamps come on when a door isopened.

Reading LampsIf equipped with reading lamps,press the button next to each lampto turn it on or off.

The vehicle may also have readinglamps in other locations. The lampscannot be adjusted.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingIf it is dark enough outside, theexterior lamps will turn on brieflywhen unlocking the vehicle with theRKE transmitter.

Entry/Exit LightingThe vehicle has an illuminatedentry/exit feature.

The dome lamps come on if theEDOME OFF button is in theextended position, when a door isopened, or the key is removed fromthe ignition.

Exit LightingIf it is dark enough outside, theexterior lamps will turn on when theignition is turned off. This featuremay be programmable. See VehiclePersonalization 0 120.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle may have ElectricPower Management (EPM) thatestimates the battery's temperatureand state of charge. It then adjuststhe voltage for best performanceand extended life of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.


Lighting 131

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as SERVICEBATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM.If this messages displays, it is

recommended that the driver reducethe electrical loads as much aspossible.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the domelamps if they are left on for morethan 10 minutes when the ignition isoff. This helps to prevent the batteryfrom running down.

Exterior Lighting BatterySaverThe exterior lamps turn off about10 minutes after the ignition isturned off, if the parking lamps orheadlamps have been manually lefton. This protects against drainingthe battery. To restart the 10-minutetimer, turn the exterior lamp controlto the O position and then back to

the; or2 position.

To keep the lamps on for more than10 minutes, the ignition must be onor in ACC/ACCESSORY.


132 Infotainment System

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . 133Overview (AM-FM Radio) . . . . . 133Overview (Radio withCD/MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 141Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 141

Audio PlayersAvoiding Untrusted MediaDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

OnStar SystemOnStar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Introduction

InfotainmentBase radio information is included inthis manual. See the infotainmentmanual for information on otheravailable infotainment systems.

Read the following pages tobecome familiar with the features.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road fortoo long or too often while usingany infotainment feature cancause a crash. You or otherscould be injured or killed. Do notgive extended attention toinfotainment tasks while driving.Limit your glances at the vehicledisplays and focus your attentionon driving. Use voice commandswhenever possible.

The infotainment system has built-infeatures intended to help avoiddistraction by disabling some

functions when driving. Thesefunctions may gray out when theyare unavailable. Many infotainmentfeatures are also available throughthe instrument cluster and steeringwheel controls.

Before driving:

. Become familiar with theoperation, center stack controls,and infotainment displaycontrols.

. Set up the audio by presettingfavorite stations, setting thetone, and adjusting thespeakers.

. Set up phone numbers inadvance so they can be calledeasily by pressing a singlecontrol or by using a single voicecommand if equipped withBluetooth phone capability.

See Defensive Driving 0 166.

To play the infotainment system withthe ignition off, see RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 180.


Infotainment System 133

Active Noise Cancellation (ANC)

If equipped, ANC reduces enginenoise in the vehicle’s interior. ANCrequires the factory-installed audiosystem, radio, speakers, amplifier (ifequipped), induction system, andexhaust system to work properly.Deactivation is required by yourdealer if related aftermarketequipment is installed.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe theft-deterrent feature works bylearning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) to theinfotainment system. Theinfotainment system does notoperate if it is stolen or moved to adifferent vehicle.

Overview (AM-FM Radio)

AM-FM Radio

1. 4. Press to show information

on the current station ortrack.

2. FAV

. Press to scroll through thefavorite pages.

3. MENU

. Press to set the number offavorite pages.

. Press to select the SpeedCompensation Volumesetting.


134 Infotainment System. Press to turn Auto Page

Text Information on or off.

4. Buttons 1 - 6

. Press to save and selectfavorite stations.

5. EQ

. Press to adjust theequalizer.

6. f. Press to set the bass,

midrange, treble, fade, andbalance.

. Turn to manually selectradio stations.

7. CAT

. Press to display a list ofSXM categories,if equipped.

8. Auxiliary Input Jack (IfEquipped)

. Use to connect externalaudio devices.

9. SRCE

. Press to scroll throughauxiliary devices, AM, FM,or SXM if equipped.

10. \ FWD

. Press and hold to fastforward through a track.

11. s REV

. Press and hold to gobackward fast through atrack.

12. P. Press to turn the

infotainment system onor off.

. Turn to adjust the volume.

13. ¨ SEEK

. Seeks or scans to the nextstation.

14. © SEEK

. Seeks or scans to theprevious station.

15. H. Press to set the clock

and date.



Overview (Radio with CD/MP3)

Radio with CD/MP3

1. 4. Press to show information

on the current station ortrack.

2. FAV

. Press to scroll through thefavorite pages.

3. MENU

. Press to set the number offavorite pages.

. Press to select the SpeedCompensation Volumesetting.

. Press to turn Auto PageText Information on or off.

4. Buttons 1 - 6

. Saves and selects favoritestations.

5. EQ

. Press to adjust theequalizer.

6. f. Press to set the bass,

midrange, treble, fade, andbalance.

. Turn to manually selectradio stations.

7. CAT

. Press to display a list ofSXM categories,if equipped.

8. Z EJECT

. Press to eject theloaded CD.



9. Auxiliary Input Jack (IfEquipped)

. Use to connect externalaudio devices.

10. CD/AUX

. Press to scroll throughselecting the CD or anauxiliary device.

11. \ FWD

. Press and hold to fastforward through a track.

12. s REV

. Press and hold to gobackward fast through atrack.

13. P. Press to turn the

infotainment system onor off.

. Turn to adjust the volume.

14. ¨ SEEK

. Seeks or scans to the nextstation.

15. © SEEK

. Seeks or scans to theprevious station.

16. BAND

. Press to scroll through theavailable bands FM1, FM2,AM, or SXM if equipped.

17. H. Press to set the clock

and date.

Operation

Using the Radio

O : Press to turn the system onand off.

Turn clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the volume.

4 : Press to switch the displaybetween the radio station frequencyand the time. While the ignition isoff, press this button to display thetime. Press to display additional textinformation related to the currentFM-RDS station or MP3 song.A choice of additional information

such as Channel, Song, Artist, andCAT (category) can display.Continue pressing to highlight thedesired tab, or press the softkeyunder any one of the tabs and theinformation about that tab displays.

Speed Compensated Volume(SCV) : Radios with SCVautomatically adjusts the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speedchanges while driving, so that thevolume level stays consistent.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to thedesired level.

2. Press the MENU button todisplay the radio setup menu.

3. Press the softkey under theAUTO VOLUM (automaticvolume) tab on the infotainmentdisplay.

4. Press the softkey under thedesired Speed CompensatedVolume setting (OFF, Low,Med, or High) to select thelevel of radio volume



compensation. The displaytimes out after approximately10 seconds. Each highersetting allows for more radiovolume compensation at fastervehicle speeds.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

To adjust the bass or treble:

1. Press the f knob until Bass orTreble displays.

2. To adjust the setting, do one ofthe following:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press ¨ SEEK, or © SEEK.

EQ : Press this button to choosebass and treble equalizationsettings designed for different typesof music. Selecting MANUAL,or changing bass or treble, returnsthe EQ to the manual bass andtreble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE : To adjust the balanceor fade:

1. Press the f knob until thespeaker control tabs display.

2. Highlight the desired speakercontrol tab by doing one of thefollowing:

. Press the f knob.

. Press the softkey under thedesired tab.

3. Adjust the setting by doing oneof the following:

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.

. Press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK.

. Press\ FWD ors REV.

To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press the f knob for more thantwo seconds.

If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) isturned on, the radio disables FADEand mutes the rear speakers.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error : The audiosystem has been calibrated for thevehicle from the factory.If Calibration Error displays, itmeans that the radio has not beenconfigured properly for the vehicleand it must be returned to yourdealer for service.

VIN or NO VIN : One of thesemessages will display when theTheftLock system has locked up theradio. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.



Radio

AM-FM Radio

Radio Data System (RDS)

The radio may have an RDS. TheRDS feature is available for useonly on FM stations that broadcastRDS information. This system reliesupon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and only workswhen the information is available.While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters display. In rare cases,a radio station could broadcastincorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radiostation.

Finding a Station

BAND or SRCE : Press to switchbetween FM1, FM2, AM, and SXM.The selection displays.

f : Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the station frequency.

© SEEK or ¨ SEEK : Press ©SEEK to go to the previous or ¨SEEK to go to the next station andstay there.

To scan stations, press and holdeither button for two seconds until abeep sounds. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. ForAM-FM Radio and Radio with CD,the station frequency flashes whilethe radio is in the scan mode. Presseither button again to stop scanning.

The radio seeks and scans stationsonly with a strong signal that are inthe selected band.

Scan presets within the currentselected band by pressing andholding either SEEK button forfour seconds until a double beepsounds. The radio goes to a storedpreset, plays for a few seconds if astrong signal is present, then goesto the next stored preset. Thestation frequency flashes while theradio is in the scan mode.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

You are encouraged to set up radiostation favorites while the vehicle isparked. Tune to favorite stationsusing the presets, favorites button,and steering wheel controls,if equipped. See Defensive Driving0 166.

FAV : If equipped with a FAV button,a maximum of 36 stations can beprogrammed as favorites by usingthe six softkeys below the radiostation frequency tabs and by usingthe radio favorites page button (FAVbutton). Press FAV to go through upto six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations availableper page. Each page of favoritescan contain any combination of AMand FM stations.

The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted, arestored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radiostation.



2. Press FAV to display the pagewhere the station is to bestored.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beepsounds. When that softkey ispressed and released, thestation that was set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for eachsoftkey radio station to bestored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages canbe set up using the MENU button.To set up the number of favoritespages:

1. Press MENU to display theradio setup menu.

2. Press the softkey below theFAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thesoftkey below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press FAV, or let the menu timeout, to return to the originalmain radio screen showing theradio station frequency tabs

and to begin the process ofprogramming favorites for thechosen number of numberedpages.

Satellite RadioSiriusXM, if equipped, is a satelliteradio service based in the UnitedStates and Canada only.

Finding a Category (CAT)Station

CAT : The CAT button is used tofind SXM channels (if equipped)while the radio is in the SXM mode.

Finding a Channel

BAND or SRCE : Press to switchbetween FM1, FM2, AM, and SXM ifequipped. The selection displays.

f : Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the station frequency.

© SEEK or ¨ SEEK : Press ©SEEK to go to the previous or ¨SEEK to go to the next station andstay there.

To scan stations, press and holdeither button for two seconds until abeep sounds. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Thestation frequency flashes while theradio is in the scan mode. Presseither button again to stop scanning.

The radio seeks and scans stationsonly with a strong signal that are inthe selected band.

To scan presets within the currentselected band, press and hold eitherSEEK button for four seconds until adouble beep sounds. The radiogoes to a stored preset, plays for afew seconds if a strong signal ispresent, then goes to the nextstored preset. The station frequencyflashes while the radio is in thescan mode.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

You are encouraged to set up radiostation favorites while the vehicle isparked. Tune to favorite stationsusing the presets, favorites button,



and steering wheel controls,if equipped. See Defensive Driving0 166.

FAV : If equipped with a FAV button,a maximum of 36 stations can beprogrammed as favorites using thesix softkeys below the radio stationfrequency tabs and by using theradio favorites page button (FAVbutton). Press FAV to go through upto six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations availableper page. Each page of favoritescan contain any combination of AM,FM, or SXM stations.

The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted arestored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radiostation.

2. Press FAV to display the pagewhere the station is to bestored.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beepsounds. When that softkey ispressed and released, thestation that was set returns.

4. Repeat the steps for eachsoftkey radio station to bestored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages canbe set up using the MENU button.To set up the number of favoritespages:

1. Press MENU to display theradio setup menu.

2. Press the softkey below theFAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thesoftkey below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press FAV, or let the menu timeout, to return to the originalmain radio screen showing theradio station frequency tabsand to begin the process of

programming favorites for thechosen number of numberedpages.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms and



power lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

FM Stereo

FM stereo gives the best sound, butFM signals reach only about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Tall buildings orhills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade inand out.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the radio. Thisinterference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference causes an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna will gothrough most car washes as long asit is securely attached. If the

antenna becomes slightly bent,straighten it out by hand. If it isbadly bent, replace it.

Occasionally check that the antennais tight at the base. If tightening isrequired, protect the paint fromdamage.

Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is on theroof of the vehicle. The antenna isused for the Navigation System,OnStar and the SiriusXM SatelliteRadio Service System if the vehiclehas these features. Tall buildings,hills, trees, heavy foliage, tunnels,bridges, and garages will affectreception. Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear reception.Make sure there is sufficientclearance when entering garages orparking structures.

Audio Players

Avoiding Untrusted MediaDevicesWhen using media devices such asCDs, DVDs, Blu-ray Discs, SDcards, USB devices, and mobiledevices, consider the source.Untrusted media devices couldcontain files that affect systemoperation or performance. Avoid useif the content or origin cannot betrusted.

CD Player

Care of the CD Player

Do not add any label to a CD.It could get caught in the CD player.If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of therecorded CD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners is notadvised, due to the risk ofcontaminating the lens of the CDoptics with lubricants internal to theCD player mechanism.



Caution

If a label is added to a CD, morethan one CD is inserted into theslot at a time, or an attempt ismade to play scratched ordamaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD PlayerMessages” later in this section.

Care of CDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R orCD-RW quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in theiroriginal cases or other protective

cases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If thesurface of a CD is damaged, suchas cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD does not play properly or notat all. Do not touch the bottom sideof a CD while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up CDsby the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled,clean it with a soft, lint-free cloth ordampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,neutral detergent solution mixedwith water. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Inserting a CD

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the CD should begin playing.

Ejecting a CD

Z EJECT : Press and release toeject the disc. Remove the CDwhen Remove Disc displays. If the

disc is not removed, after severalseconds the disc is automaticallypulled back into the player.

Playing a CD

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD in the player, it stays inthe player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CDsymbol displays on the left side ofthe radio display. As each new trackstarts to play, the track numberdisplays.

The CD player can play the smaller8 cm (3 in) single CDs with anadapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

CD/AUX : Press to cycle betweenCD or Auxiliary when listening to theradio. The CD icon and a messageshowing the disc and/or tracknumber will display when a CD is inthe player. Press again and thesystem automatically searches foran auxiliary input device; see



Auxiliary Devices 0 146. If aportable audio player is notconnected, “No Input Device Found”displays.

4 : Press to display additional textinformation related to the currentsong. If information is available, thesong title information displays onthe top line of the display and artistinformation displays on the bottomline. When information is notavailable, NO INFO displays.

f : Turn to select tracks on the CDthat is currently playing.

© SEEK : Press to go to the start ofthe current track if more than10 seconds on the CD have played.

Press to go to the previous track ifless than 10 seconds on the CDhave played.

Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving backwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

¨ SEEK : Press to go to the nexttrack.

Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV : Press and hold to reverseplayback quickly within a track.

\ FWD : Press and hold toadvance playback quickly within atrack.

RDM : Press to listen to tracks inrandom, rather than sequentialorder. To use random, do one of thefollowing:

For the AM-FM Radio with CD/MP3:

1. Press the RDM button until therandom icon displays.

2. Press the RDM button againuntil the random icondisappears from the display.

For the Radio with CD/MP3:

1. Press the softkey positionedunder the RDM tab untilRandom Current Disc displays.

2. Press the softkey again to turnoff random play.

MP3-Supported Files

The Radio with CD/MP3 have thecapability of playing an MP3 CD-Ror CD-RW disc.

Format

Radios that have the capability ofplaying MP3s can play .mp3 or .wmafiles that were recorded onto aCD-R or CD-RW disc. The files canbe recorded with the following fixedbit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps ora variable bit rate.

Compressed Audio or Mixed ModeDiscs

The radio can play discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio and MP3 files. If both formatsare on the disc, the radio reads allMP3 files first, then theuncompressed CD audio files.



CD-R- or CD-RW-Supported Fileand Folder Structure

The radio supports:

. Up to 50 folders.

. Up to eight folders in depth.

. Up to 50 playlists.

. Up to 255 files.

. Playlists with an .m3u or .wplextension.

. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cdafile extension.

Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. Files are stored in the rootdirectory when the disc or storagedevice does not contain folders.Files accessed from the rootdirectory of a CD display asF1 ROOT.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

Order of Play

Compressed audio files areaccessed in the following order:

. Playlists (Px).

. Files stored in the root directory.

. Files stored in folders in the rootdirectory.

Tracks are played in the followingorder:

. Play begins from the first track inthe first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first track inthe first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.

File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name contained in the ID3 tag.If the song name is not present inthe ID3 tag, then the radio displaysthe file name without the extension(such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32characters or four pages areshortened. The display does notshow parts of words on the lastpage of text, and the extension ofthe file name is not displayed.

Preprogrammed Playlists

CDs that have preprogrammedplaylists created using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed; however,there is no playlist-editing capabilityusing the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playlists that have an .m3u or .plsfile extension and are stored on aUSB device may be supported bythe radio with a USB port.



Playlists can be changed by usingthe softkeys below the Sc andc T tabs, the f knob, the © SEEKbutton, or the ¨ SEEK button. AnMP3 CD-R or CD-RW that has beenrecorded without using file folderscan be played. If a CD-R or CD-RWcontains more than the maximum of50 folders, 15 playlists, and512 folders and files, the playerallows access and navigates up tothe maximum, but all items over themaximum are not accessible.

Playing an MP3

4 : Press to display additional textinformation related to the currentsong. If information is available, thesong title information displays onthe top line of the display and artistinformation displays on the bottomline. When information is notavailable, NO INFO displays.

f : Turn to select MP3s on the CDcurrently playing.

© SEEK : Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK : Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

s REV : Press and hold to reverseplayback quickly. Sound is heard ata reduced volume and the elapsedtime of the file displays. ReleasesREV to resume playing.

\ FWD : Press and hold toadvance playback quickly. Sound isheard at a reduced volume and theelapsed time of the file displays.Release\ FWD to resumeplaying. The elapsed time of the filedisplays.

Sc : Press the softkey below theSc tab to go to the first track inthe previous folder.

c T : Press the softkey below thec T tab to go to the first track inthe next folder.

RDM : Press to listen to tracks inrandom, rather than sequentialorder. To use random, do one of thefollowing:

For the Radio with CD/MP3:

1. Press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random CurrentDisc displays.

2. Press the softkey again to turnoff random play.

h : Press the softkey below theh tab to play the files in order byartist or album.

The player scans the disc to sort thefiles by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc dependingon the number of files on the disc.The radio may begin playing while itis scanning in the background.

When the scan is finished, the discbegins playing files in order byartist. The current artist playing isshown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artist



are played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey below either arrowtab. The disc goes to the next orprevious artist in alphabetical order.Continue pressing either softkeybelow the arrow tab until the desiredartist displays.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey below theSort By tab.

2. Press one of the softkeysbelow the Album tab from thesort screen.

3. Press the softkey below theBack tab to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.

The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrows,and songs from the current albumbegin to play. Once all songs fromthat album have played, the playermoves to the next album in

alphabetical order on the CD andbegins playing MP3s from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.

CD Player Messages

CHECK DISC : If this messagedisplays and/or the CD ejects, itcould be for one of the followingreasons:

. It is very hot. When thetemperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There was a problem whileburning the CD.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.

Auxiliary Devices

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

Radios with an auxiliary input jackon the lower right side can connectto an external audio device such asan iPod, MP3 player, or CD playerfor use as another source for audiolistening. This input jack is not anaudio output; do not plugheadphones into the front auxiliaryinput jack.

Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). SeeDefensive Driving 0 166 for moreinformation on driver distraction.



To use a portable audio player,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe radio's front auxiliary input jack.When a device is connected, pressthe radio CD/AUX button to beginplaying audio from the device overthe vehicle speakers.

For optimal sound quality, increasethe portable audio device's volumeto the loudest level.

It is always best to power theportable audio device through itsown battery while playing.

O : Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the volume of the portableplayer. Additional volumeadjustments might have to be madefrom the portable device if thevolume is not loud or soft enough.

BAND : If equipped, press to listento the radio when a portable audiodevice is playing. The portableaudio device continues playing.

CD/AUX : If equipped, press to playa CD when a portable audio deviceis playing. Press again and thesystem begins playing audio from

the connected portable audio player.If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Input Device Found”displays.

SRCE : If equipped, press to listento the radio when a portable audiodevice is playing. The portableaudio device continues playing.

Press to play a CD when a portableaudio device is playing. Press againand the system begins playingaudio from the connected portableaudio player. If a portable audioplayer is not connected, “No InputDevice Found” displays.

Using the USB Port

Radios with a USB port can controla USB storage device or an iPodusing the radio buttons and knobs.See “Playing an MP3” in CD Player0 141 for information about how toconnect and control a USB storagedevice or an iPod.

USB Support

If equipped, the USB port is on theinstrument panel and uses theUSB 2.0 standard.

USB-Supported Devices

. USB flash drive

. Portable USB hard drive

. Fifth generation or later iPod

. iPod nano

. iPod touch

. iPod classic

Not all iPods and USB drives arecompatible with the USB port.



Make sure the iPod has the latestfirmware from Apple for properoperation. iPod firmware can beupdated using the latest iTunesapplication. See www.apple.com/itunes.

For help with identifying the iPod, goto www.apple.com/support.

Radios that have a USB port canplay .mp3 and .wma files that arestored on a USB storage device aswell as AAC files that are stored onan iPod.

USB-Supported File and FolderStructure

The radio supports:

. Up to 700 folders.

. Up to eight folders in depth.

. Up to 65,535 files.

. Folder and file names up to64 bytes.

. Files with an .mp3 or .wma fileextension.

. AAC files stored on an iPod.

. FAT16.

. FAT32.

Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod

The USB port can be used tocontrol an iPod or a USB storagedevice.

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB porton the instrument panel.

To connect an iPod, connect oneend of the USB cable that camewith the iPod to the iPod’s dockconnector and connect the otherend to the USB port on theinstrument panel. If the vehicle is onand the USB connection works, “OKto disconnect” and a GM logo mayappear on the iPod, and iPodappears on the infotainment display.The iPod music appears on theinfotainment display and beginsplaying.

The iPod charges while it isconnected to the vehicle if theignition is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY. When the vehicle isturned off, the iPod automatically

powers off and will not charge ordraw power from the vehicle'sbattery.

If you have an older iPod model thatis not supported, it can still be usedby connecting it to the auxiliaryinput jack using a standard 3.5 mm(1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack” previously inthis section.

Using the Radio to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The radio can control a USBstorage device or an iPod using theradio buttons and knobs, and candisplay song information on theinfotainment display.

f : Turn to select files.

© SEEK : Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK : Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.



s REV : Press and hold to reverseplayback quickly. Sound is heard ata reduced volume. Releases REVto resume playing. The elapsed timeof the file displays.

\ FWD : Press and hold toadvance playback quickly. Sound isheard at a reduced volume. Release\ FWD to resume playing. Theelapsed time of the file displays.

4 : Press to display additionalinformation about the selected track.

Using Softkeys to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The five softkeys below theinfotainment display are used tocontrol the functions listed below.

To use the softkeys:

1. Press the first or fifth softkeybelow the infotainment displayto display the functions listedbelow, or press the softkeybelow the function if it iscurrently displayed.

2. Press the softkey below the tabwith the function on it to usethat function.

j : Press the softkey below j topause the track. The tab appearsraised when pause is being used.Press the softkey below j again toresume playback.

Back : Press the softkey below theBack tab to go back to the maindisplay screen on an iPod, or theroot directory on a USB storagedevice.

c : Press the softkey belowc toview the contents of the currentfolder on the USB drive. To browseand select files:

1. Press the softkey belowc.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof folders.

3. Press f to select the desiredfolder. If there is more then onefolder, repeat Steps 1 and 2until the desired folder isreached.

4. Turn f to scroll through thefiles in the selected folder.

5. Press f to select the desiredfile to be played.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:

. First softkey, first item in the list.

. Second softkey, 1% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.

h : Press the softkey belowhto view and select a file on an iPod,using the iPod's menu system. Filesare sorted by:

. Playlists

. Artists

. Albums


150 Infotainment System. Genres

. Songs

. Composers

To select files:

1. Press the softkey belowh.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof menus.

3. Press f to select thedesired menu.

4. Turn f to scroll through thefolders or files in theselected menu.

5. Press f to select the desiredfile to be played.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:

. First softkey, first item in the list.

. Second softkey, 1% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.

Repeat Functionality

To use Repeat:

Press the softkey below" or'to select between Repeat All andRepeat Track.

" : Press the softkey below" torepeat all tracks. The tab appearslowered when Repeat All is beingused. This is the default mode whena USB storage device or iPod is firstconnected.

' : Press the softkey below'to repeat one track. The tabappears raised when Repeat Trackis being used.

Shuffle Functionality

To use Shuffle:

Press the softkey below>,2,C , or= to select betweenShuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,or Shuffle Folder.

> : Press the softkey below2to turn shuffle off. This is the defaultmode when a USB storage deviceor iPod is first connected.

2 : Press the softkey below= orC to shuffle all songs onthe USB storage device or iPod.

C : Press the softkey below>to shuffle all songs in the currentalbum on an iPod.

= : Press the softkey below>to shuffle all songs in the currentfolder on a USB storage device.



OnStar SystemOnStar with 4G LTE

If equipped with OnStar 4G LTE, upto seven devices, such assmartphones, tablets, and laptops,can be connected to high-speedInternet through the vehicle’s built-inWi-Fi hotspot.

Call 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to connect to anOnStar Advisor for assistance. Seewww.onstar.com for a detailedinstruction guide, vehicle availability,details, and system limitations.Services and apps vary by make,model, year, carrier, availability, andconditions. 4G LTE service isavailable in select markets. 4G LTEperformance is based on industryaverages and vehicle systemsdesign. Some services require adata plan.

Phone

BluetoothFor vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:

. Placement and receipt of calls ina hands-free mode.

. Sharing of the cell phone’saddress book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:

. Become familiar with thefeatures of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.


152 Infotainment System. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.

The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section for more information.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in this sectionfor more information.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section formore information.

{ Warning

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment system.Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

A Bluetooth system can use aBluetooth-capable cell phone with aHands-Free Profile to make and

receive phone calls. The systemcan be used while the ignition is onor in ACC/ACCESSORY. The rangeof the Bluetooth system can be upto 9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phonessupport all functions, and not allphones work with the in-vehicleBluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation on compatible phones inU.S. and Canada only.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information, say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise : Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak : A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak : Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes through thevehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons on the steeringwheel to operate the in-vehicleBluetooth system. See SteeringWheel Controls 0 94.

b / g : Press to answer incomingcalls, confirm system information,and start speech recognition.

c /x : Press to end a call, rejecta call, or cancel an operation.



Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seethe cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if equipped. See OnStarOverview 0 348.

Pairing Information

. A Bluetooth phone with MP3capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To connect to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold b / g fortwo seconds.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The systemresponds with instructions anda four-digit PersonalIdentification Number (PIN).The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want topair. For help with this process,see the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. Afterthe PIN is successfully entered,the system prompts you toprovide a name for the pairedcell phone. This name will beused to indicate which phonesare paired and connected tothe vehicle. The systemresponds with “<phone name>has been successfully paired”after the pairing process iscomplete.

6. Repeat Steps 1–5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.




2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system askswhich phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”

. If another cell phone isfound, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to 30phone numbers as name tags in theHands-Free Directory that is sharedbetween the Bluetooth and OnStarsystems, if equipped.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store : This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store : This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete : This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags : Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands-Free CallingDirectory and the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number orgroup of numbers you want tostore all at once with nopauses, then follow thedirections given by the systemto save a name tag for thisnumber.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.



To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone. Afterthe last digit has been entered,say “Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the systemto save a name tag for thisnumber.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands-FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call : The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial : This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re-dial : This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Calling Emergency

1. Press and hold b / g fortwo seconds. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.




3. Say [emergency number].



Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. Aftereach digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone. Afterthe last digit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re-dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.”


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Pressc /x to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Pressc /x to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three-Way Calling

Three-way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three-way call.”



3. Use the dial or call commandto dial the number of the thirdparty to be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Pressc /x to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

. To mute a call, press b / g , andthen say “Mute call.”

. To cancel mute, press b / g ,and then say “Un-mute call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can be

transferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to on.

Transferring Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

Transferring Audio to theBluetooth System from a CellPhone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass-thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling a



menu-driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious section “Deleting a PairedPhone” and the previous sectionson deleting name tags.

Other Information

The Bluetooth word mark and logosare owned by the Bluetooth SIG,Inc. and any use of such marks byGeneral Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement0 344.


Climate Controls 159

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . 159Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . 161Rear Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

MaintenanceService . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Climate Control SystemsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

Vehicles without Air Conditioning

1. Fan Control



9 : Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed.

9 : Turns the system off.

Temperature Control : Turn theknob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle.

Air Delivery Mode Control : Turnthe knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to change thecurrent airflow mode.

H : Air is directed to the instrumentpanel outlets.


160 Climate Controls

) : Air is divided between theinstrument panel and floor outlets,with some air directed toward thewindshield.

6 : Air is directed to the flooroutlets with some air directed to thewindshield and side windows.

- : This mode clears the windowsof fog or moisture. Outside air isdirected to the floor and defrosteroutlets. Adjust the temperature knobfor warmer or cooler air. The airconditioning compressor might turnon in this setting to dehumidifythe air.

1 : This mode clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield, with some to the flooroutlets and front side windows. Theair conditioning compressor mightturn on in this setting to dehumidifythe air.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Vehicles with Air Conditioning

1. Fan Control



4. Rear Window Defogger (IfEquipped)

On hot days, open the windows tolet hot inside air escape; then closethem. This helps to reduce the timeneeded for the vehicle to cool downand the system operates moreefficiently.

# : Cools and dehumidifies the airinside of the vehicle.

V : Cools the air inside the vehiclefaster, by recirculating the inside air.

Rear Window Defogger

If equipped with a rear windowdefogger, a warming grid is used toremove fog or frost from the rearwindow.

1 : Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatthe rear window defogger is on.



The defogger only works when theignition is on. The defogger turns offif the ignition is turned off or to ACC/ACCESSORY.

Heated Mirrors: If equipped withheated outside mirrors, the mirrorsheat to help clear fog or frost fromthe surface of the mirror when1 ispressed. See Heated Mirrors 0 39.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Caution

Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rearwindow. Do not adhere anythingto the defogger grid lines in therear glass. These actions maydamage the rear defogger.Repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Rear Heating SystemIf equipped, the rear heating systemlets you adjust the amount of airflowing into the rear of the vehicle,

from the front seating area. Thisfeature works with the main climatecontrol system in the vehicle.

AUX : The thumbwheel for thissystem is on the instrument panelbelow the audio system.

9 : Turn the thumbwheel up ordown to increase or decrease theamount of heated air sent to therear seating area.

Q : This position supplies the mostamount of heat to the rearseating area.

c : This position supplies half theamount of heat to the rearseating area.

R : This position supplies the leastamount of heat to the rearseating area.

9 : This turns the rear heatingsystem off.

Rear Climate ControlSystemIf equipped with a rear heating andair conditioning system, it controlsthe temperature, fan speed, and airdelivery for the rear seatpassengers only. The front climatecontrol panel is in the overheadconsole between the driver andfront passenger.



Front Climate Control Panel

1. Fan Control



Use this control panel to maintain aseparate temperature setting. Adjustthe direction of the airflow or adjustthe fan speed for the rear seatpassenger(s).

When the fan knob is in the AUXposition, the rear climate controlpanel can be used to adjust theclimate settings in the rearseating area.



Rear Climate Control Panel

1. Fan Control



For vehicles with a rear climatecontrol panel, it is located overheadbehind the driver and frontpassenger, centered in front of thesecond row. To adjust the rearclimate control panel settings by arear seat passenger, the frontclimate control panel fan knob mustbe in the AUX position. The fanspeed, air delivery mode, andtemperature can then be adjusted.

AUX : Turn the fan knob on thefront climate control panel to AUX tolet rear seat passengers use thecontrol panel in the rear seatingarea. This disables the front controlpanel. To return control to the frontpanel, move the fan knob outof AUX.

9 : Turns the system off.

9 : Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed in the rearseating area.

Temperature Control : Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease thetemperature in the rearseating area.

The air conditioning system on themain climate control panel must beturned on to direct cooled air to therear of the vehicle. If it is not on,then the temperature in the rear ofthe vehicle remains at cabintemperature.

Air Delivery Mode Control : Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the direction of the airflow inthe rear seating area.

To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

H : Air is directed to the upperoutlets, with some directed to thefloor outlets.

2 : Air is directed to the flooroutlets.



Be sure to keep the area under thefront seats clear of any objects sothat the air inside of the vehicle cancirculate effectively.

For information on how to use themain climate control system, seeClimate Control Systems 0 159. Forinformation on ventilation, see AirVents 0 164.

Air VentsUse the outlets located near thecenter and on the sides of theinstrument panel to change thedirection of airflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow or

leaves from the air inlets at thebase of the windshield that mayblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors may adversely affectthe performance of the system.

. Clear snow off the hood toimprove visibility and helpdecrease moisture drawn intothe vehicle.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

Maintenance

ServiceAll vehicles have a label underhoodthat identifies the refrigerant used inthe vehicle. The refrigerant systemshould only be serviced by trainedand certified technicians. The airconditioning evaporator shouldnever be repaired or replaced byone from a salvage vehicle.It should only be replaced by a newevaporator to ensure proper andsafe operation.

During service, all refrigerantsshould be reclaimed with properequipment. Venting refrigerantsdirectly to the atmosphere is harmfulto the environment and may alsocreate unsafe conditions based oninhalation, combustion, frostbite,or other health-based concerns.

The air conditioning system requiresperiodic maintenance. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 318.


Driving and Operating 165

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 167Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 168Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . 169Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 170Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 172Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . 176Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 178Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . 180Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . 185Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . 192

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Driver Assistance SystemsDriver Assistance Systems . . . 197Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . 198Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

FuelTop Tier Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . 206Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 207Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Trailer TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . 225

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227


166 Driving and Operating

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, keepyour eyes on the road, keep yourhands on the steering wheel, andfocus your attention on driving.

. Do not use a phone indemanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem and the navigation system,if equipped, including pairing andusing a cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe seat belt. See Seat Belts 0 50.

. Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.


Driving and Operating 167. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:

. Keep enough distance betweenyou and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.

Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Hydraulic Power Steering

Your vehicle has hydraulic powersteering. It may requiremaintenance. See Power SteeringFluid 0 249.

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops orbecause of a system malfunction,the vehicle can be steered but mayrequire increased effort. See yourdealer if there is a problem.

Caution

If the steering wheel is turneduntil it reaches the end of itstravel, and is held in that positionfor more than 15 seconds,damage may occur to the powersteering system and there may beloss of power steering assist.



Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.

. Reduce speed before entering acurve.

. Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the curve.

. Wait until the vehicle is out ofthe curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:

. Braking Skid — wheels are notrolling.

. Steering or Cornering Skid —too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.



If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:

. Ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.



Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

. Allow extra following distance.

. Pass with caution.

. Keep windshield wipingequipment in good shape.

. Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tires with propertread depth. See Tires 0 269.

. Turn off cruise control.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips include:

. Keep the vehicle serviced and ingood shape.

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow thevehicle on a long downhill slopecan cause brake overheating, canreduce brake performance, andcould result in a loss of braking.Shift the transmission to a lowergear to let the engine assist thebrakes on a steep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. This can causeoverheating of the brakes andloss of steering assist. Alwayshave the engine running and thevehicle in gear.

. Drive at speeds that keep thevehicle in its own lane. Do notswing wide or cross thecenter line.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(e.g., stalled car, crash).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (e.g., falling rocks area,winding roads, long grades,passing or no-passing zones)and take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Snow or ice between the tires andthe road creates less traction orgrip, so drive carefully. Wet ice canoccur at about 0 °C (32 °F) whenfreezing rain begins to fall. Avoiddriving on wet ice or in freezing rainuntil roads can be treated.

For slippery road driving:

. Accelerate gently. Acceleratingtoo quickly causes the wheels tospin and makes the surfaceunder the tires slick.

. Turn on Traction Control. SeeTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 192.


Driving and Operating 171. Antilock Brake System (ABS)

improves vehicle stability duringhard stops, but the brakesshould be applied sooner thanwhen on dry pavement. SeeAntilock Brake System (ABS)0 190.

. Allow greater following distanceand watch for slippery spots. Icypatches can occur on otherwiseclear roads in shaded areas.The surface of a curve or anoverpass can remain icy whenthe surrounding roads are clear.Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

. Turn off cruise control.

Blizzard Conditions

Stop the vehicle in a safe place andsignal for help. Stay with the vehicleunless there is help nearby.If possible, use Roadside

Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program 0 338. To gethelp and keep everyone in thevehicle safe:


. Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO), whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in snow:

. Clear snow from the base ofthe vehicle, especially anyblocking the exhaust pipe.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the vehicle sidethat is away from the wind,to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to circulate the airinside the vehicle and setthe fan speed to the highestsetting. See “ClimateControl Systems.”

For more information about CO,see Engine Exhaust 0 184.

To save fuel, run the engine forshort periods to warm the vehicleand then shut the engine off andpartially close the window. Movingabout to keep warm also helps.

If it takes time for help to arrive,when running the engine, push theaccelerator pedal slightly so theengine runs faster than the idle



speed. This keeps the batterycharged to restart the vehicle and tosignal for help with the headlamps.Do this as little as possible, tosave fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 192.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle 0 305.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called the

vehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle mayshow how much weight it wasdesigned to carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoreduce stopping distance,damage the tires, and shortenthe life of the vehicle.



Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar). The tire and loadinginformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipment

tires (3) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (4).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires 0 269and Tire Pressure 0 277.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It mayshow the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axle. See“Certification/Tire Label” later inthis section.

“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–

1. Locate the statement "Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount ofcargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals1400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb passengers inyour vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from yourtrailer will be transferred to



your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing 0 215 forimportant information on towing atrailer, towing safety rules andtrailering tips.

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs)

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs)

Example 2

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 136 kg(750 lbs)

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs)

Example 3

1. Maximum Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 3 =453 kg (1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lbs)

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)

Refer to the vehicle tire andloading information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined



weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to the rearedge of the driver door. Thelabel may show the size of thevehicle's original tires and theinflation pressures needed toobtain the gross weight capacityof the vehicle. This is calledGross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsomay show the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). To find out the actualloads on the front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weighstation and weigh the vehicle.Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out theload equally on both sides of thecenterline.

{ Warning

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. When you carrysomething inside thevehicle, secure itwhenever you can.

. Do not leave a seatfolded down unless youneed to.

Add-On Equipment

When carrying removable items,a limit on how many peoplecarried inside the vehicle maybe necessary. Be sure to weighthe vehicle before buying andinstalling the new equipment.



Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-In

Caution

The vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it willperform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

. Keep the vehicle speed at88 km/h (55 mph) or less forthe first 805 km (500mi).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500 mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can mean

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towing0 215 for the trailer towingcapabilities of the vehicleand more information.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

0. Stopping the Engine/LOCK/OFF

1. ACC/ACCESSORY

2. ON/RUN

3. START

The ignition switch has fourpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN and the brakepedal must be applied.



0 (Stopping the Engine/LOCK/OFF) : This position turns off thevehicle. It also locks the ignition, thetransmission, and the steeringcolumn, if equipped with a lockingsteering column.

To turn off the vehicle:

1. Make sure that the vehicle isstopped.

2. Shift to P (Park).

3. Continue to hold the brakepedal, then set the parkingbrake. See Parking Brake0 191.

4. Push the key all the way in thesteering column (1), then turnthe key to LOCK/OFF (2).

5. Remove the key.

6. Release the brake pedal.

See your dealer if the key can beremoved in any other position.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 180.

A warning chime will sound whenthe driver door is opened and thekey is in the ignition.

If equipped with a locking steeringcolumn, the steering can bind withthe front wheels turned off center,which may prevent key rotation outof LOCK/OFF. If this happens, movethe steering wheel from right to leftwhile turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this does not work,then the vehicle needs service.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, turn off the vehicleonly in an emergency.

In an emergency, if the vehiclecannot be pulled over and must beturned off while driving:

1. Push the key all the way intoward the steering column,then turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.

2. Brake using firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

3. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. Continuebraking and steer the vehicle toa safe location.

4. Come to a complete stop.



5. Shift to P (Park) with anautomatic transmission,or Neutral with a manualtransmission.

6. Continue to hold the brakepedal, then set the parkingbrake. See Parking Brake0 191.

7. Push the key all the way intoward the steering column,then turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF.

8. Remove the key.


Caution

Use the correct key, make sure itis all the way in — or pushed allthe way in toward the steeringcolumn when turning off thevehicle — and turn it only withyour hand.

1 (ACC/ACCESSORY) : Thisposition allows features such as theinfotainment system to operate

while the vehicle is off. It alsounlocks the steering column,if equipped with a locking steeringcolumn. Use this position if thevehicle must be pushed or towed.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 180.

From ON/RUN, push the key all theway in toward the steering column,then turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.

If the key is left in ACC/ACCESSORY with the engine off,the battery could drain and thevehicle may not start.

A warning chime will sound whenthe driver door is opened and thekey is in the ignition.

2 (ON/RUN) : This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument cluster warning andindicator lights. This position canalso be used for service anddiagnostics, and to verify the properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be requiredfor emission inspection purposes.

The switch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running. Thetransmission is also unlocked in thisposition.

If the key is left in ON/RUN with theengine off, the battery could drainand the vehicle may not start.

3 (START) : This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionreturns to ON/RUN for driving.

Starting the EngineIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

To place the transmission in theproper gear:

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.



Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipment0 227.

Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

Caution

If the steering wheel is turneduntil it reaches the end of itstravel, and is held in that positionwhile starting the vehicle, damage

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

may occur to the hydraulic powersteering system and there may beloss of power steering assist.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off theaccelerator pedal, turn theignition key to START. Whenthe engine starts, let go of thekey. The idle speed will godown as your engine getswarm. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

When the low fuel warning lightis on and the FUEL LEVELLOW message is displayed inthe Driver Information Center(DIC), the Computer-ControlledCranking System is disabled toprevent possible vehiclecomponent damage. When this

happens, hold the ignitionswitch in the START position tocontinue engine cranking.

Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not startafter five to 10 seconds,especially in very cold weather(below −18 °C or 0 °F), it couldbe flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it there asyou hold the key in START forup to 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try,to allow the cranking motor tocool down. When the engine



starts, let go of the key andaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, dothe same thing. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Fast Idle SystemIf equipped, this feature is availableonly with cruise control. The manualfast idle switch is operated using thecruise control buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel.

This system can be used toincrease engine idle speedwhenever the following conditionsare met:

. The parking brake is set.

. The brake pedal is not pressed.

. The vehicle must not be movingand the accelerator must not bepressed.

To control the fast idle:

. To enable the Fast Idle System,press and release the cruisecontrol on/off button and ensurethat the switch indicator lightis lit.

. Press and release the cruisecontrol SET- button. Enginespeed will be held atapproximately 1200 rpm.

When the fast idle is active, theDriver Information Center (DIC) willdisplay FAST IDLE ON.

One of the following actions will turnoff the fast idle:

. Pressing the brake.

. Selecting the cruise controlcancel button.

. Releasing the parking brake.

. Moving the transmission shiftlever out of P (Park) orN (Neutral).

. Selecting the cruise control on/off button when it waspreviously on.

. Pressing the cruise control SET-button a second time.

. Pressing the accelerator morethan one-quarter of theway down.

. Turning the ignition off.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:

. Audio System

. Power Windows (if equipped)

These features will work when theignition is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the ignition isturned from on to off, power to theradio and power windows willcontinue to work for 10 minutes oruntil the driver door is opened.

Engine Coolant HeaterIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.



{ Warning

Do not plug in the engine blockheater while the vehicle is parkedin a garage or under a carport.Property damage or personalinjury may result. Always park thevehicle in a clear open area awayfrom buildings or structures.

The engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditionsat or below −18 °C (0 °F). Vehicleswith an engine coolant heatershould be plugged in at least fourhours before starting. An internalthermostat in the plug end of thecord may exist which will preventengine coolant heater operation attemperatures above −18 °C (0 °F).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

4.3L V6 Engine

6.0L V8 Engine

4. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord.

For V6 engines, the cord forthe engine coolant heater is onthe driver side of the enginecompartment.

For V8 engines, the cord forthe engine coolant heater isbehind the engine air cleaner/filter.

Check the heater cord fordamage. If it is damaged, donot use it. See your dealer fora replacement. Inspect thecord for damage yearly.

5. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ Warning

Improper use of the heater cordor an extension cord can damagethe cord and may result inoverheating and fire.

. Plug the cord into athree-prong electrical utilityreceptacle that is protectedby a ground fault detection

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

function. An ungroundedoutlet could cause anelectric shock.

. Use a weatherproof,heavy-duty, 15 amp-ratedextension cord if needed.Failure to use therecommended extensioncord in good operatingcondition, or using adamaged heater orextension cord, could makeit overheat and cause a fire,property damage, electricshock, and injury.

. Do not operate the vehiclewith the heater cordpermanently attached to the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle. Possible heatercord and thermostatdamage could occur.

. While in use, do not let theheater cord touch vehicleparts or sharp edges. Neverclose the hood on theheater cord.

. Before starting the vehicle,unplug the cord, reattachthe cover to the plug, andsecurely fasten the cord.Keep the cord away fromany moving parts.

6. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine partsand prevent damage.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Shifting Into Park1. Hold the brake pedal down,

then set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into theP (Park) position by pulling theshift lever toward you andmoving it up as far as it will go.

3. Push the ignition key in,towards the steering columnand then turn the ignition off.

4. Remove the key and take itwith you. If you can leave thevehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, the vehicle isin P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park 0 182.If you are towing a trailer, seeDriving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 210.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set. After theshift lever is moved into P (Park),hold the regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shiftlever away from P (Park) without

first pulling it toward you. If you can,it means that the shift lever was notfully locked into P (Park).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift the transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle can put too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. It might be difficult topull the shift lever out of P (Park).This is called torque lock. Toprevent torque lock, set the parkingbrake and then shift into P (Park)properly before you leave the driverseat. To find out how, see ShiftingInto Park 0 182.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforereleasing the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mightneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission. Then youshould be able to pull the shift leverout of P (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThe vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You have to fully apply thebrakes before you can shift fromP (Park) when the ignition is on. SeeAutomatic Transmission 0 185.

The shift lock control system isdesigned to:

. Prevent the ignition key frombeing removed unless the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is on and the regularbrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock control system isalways functional except in the caseof a dead battery or low voltage(less than 9 V) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 301.



To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition on.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Ease the pressure on the shiftlever.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, push the shift lever allthe way into P (Park).

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, have the vehicle serviced.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO), which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:

. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation(parking garages, tunnels,deep snow that may blockunderbody airflow or tailpipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified,damaged, or improperlyrepaired.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with thewindows completely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park 0 182 andEngine Exhaust 0 184.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips 0 210.

AutomaticTransmissionA shift position indicator is in theinstrument cluster.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

See “Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode 0 188.

P : This position locks the rearwheels. It is the best position to usewhen starting the engine becausethe vehicle cannot move easily.When parked on a hill, especiallywhen the vehicle has a heavy load,you might notice an increase in theeffort to shift out of P (Park). See“Torque Lock” under Shifting IntoPark 0 182.



{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park 0 182 andDriving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 210.

R : Use this gear to back up.

Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. The

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck 0 172.

N : In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels.To restart when you are alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only. Also,use N (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hit

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

people or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

Caution

A transmission hot message maydisplay if the automatictransmission fluid is too hot.Driving under this condition candamage the vehicle. Stop and idle

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

the engine to cool the automatictransmission fluid. This messageclears when the transmission fluidhas cooled sufficiently.

D : This position is for normaldriving. It provides the best fueleconomy. If you need more powerfor passing, and you are:

. Going less than about 55 km/h(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

By doing this, the vehicle shiftsdown to the next gear and hasmore power.

D (Drive) can be used when towinga trailer, carrying a heavy load,or driving on steep hills. You mightwant to shift the transmission to alower gear selection if thetransmission shifts too often.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” underLoss of Control 0 168.

The vehicle has a shift stabilizationfeature that adjusts the transmissionshifting to the current drivingconditions in order to reduce rapidupshifts and downshifts. This shiftstabilization feature is designed todetermine, before making anupshift, if the engine is able tomaintain vehicle speed by analyzingthings such as vehicle speed,throttle position, and vehicle load.If the shift stabilization featuredetermines that a current vehiclespeed cannot be maintained, thetransmission does not upshift andinstead holds the current gear.In some cases, this could appear tobe a delayed shift, however thetransmission is operating normally.

The transmission uses adaptiveshift controls. Adaptive shift controlscontinually compare key shiftparameters to pre-programmedideal shifts stored in thetransmission’s computer. The

transmission constantly makesadjustments to improve vehicleperformance according to how thevehicle is being used, such as witha heavy load or when thetemperature changes. During thisadaptive shift control process,shifting might feel different as thetransmission determines the bestsettings.

The shift quality of a new vehiclemay not be ideal because theadaptive shift control process maynot have determined the bestsettings for a particular shift orcondition. Shift quality will improvewith continued driving.

When temperatures are very cold,the transmission's gear shiftingcould be delayed, providing morestable shifts until the engine warmsup. Shifts could be more noticeablewith a cold transmission. Thisdifference in shifting is normal.

M : This position lets drivers selectthe range of gears appropriate forcurrent driving conditions. If the



vehicle has this feature, see “RangeSelection Mode” under ManualMode 0 188.

1 : This position reduces vehiclespeed without using the brakes.You can use it for major/severedowngrades where the vehiclewould otherwise accelerate due tosteepness of grade. When you shiftto 1 (First) it provides the lowestgear appropriate to current roadspeed and continues to downshiftas the vehicle slows, eventuallydownshifting to 1 (First) gear. Thetransmission can be held in 1 (First)gear using Range Selection Modeor the shift lever. See “RangeSelection Mode” under ManualMode 0 188.

Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hillusing only the accelerator pedalmay damage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If the vehicle

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

is stuck, do not spin the tires.When stopping on a hill, use thebrakes to hold the vehicle inplace.

Normal Mode Grade Braking

This mode is enabled when thevehicle is started, but is not enabledin Range Selection Mode. It assistsin maintaining desired vehiclespeeds when driving on downhillgrades by using the engine andtransmission to slow the vehicle.The first time the system activatesfor each ignition key cycle.

To disable or enable Normal ModeGrade Braking within the currentignition key cycle, press and holdthe Tow/Haul button forthree seconds.

For other forms of grade braking,see Tow/Haul Mode 0 189 andCruise Control 0 194.

Manual Mode

Range Selection Mode

If equipped, Range Selection Modehelps control the vehicle'stransmission and vehicle speedwhile driving downhill or towing atrailer by letting you select a desiredrange of gears.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the +/− buttons on theshift lever to select the desiredrange of gears for currentdriving conditions.

When M (Manual Mode) is selected,the transmission will downshift anda number displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) next tothe M indicating the current gear.



This number is the highest gear thatcan be used. However, the vehiclecan automatically shift to lowergears as it adjusts to drivingconditions. This means that allgears below that number areavailable. When 5 (Fifth) is selected,1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears areautomatically shifted by the vehicle,but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used untilthe +/− button on the shift lever isused to change to the gear.

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode 0 189.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used.

Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hillusing only the accelerator pedalmay damage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If the vehicle

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

is stuck, do not spin the tires.When stopping on a hill, use thebrakes to hold the vehicle inplace.

Tow/Haul Mode

If equipped, Tow/Haul Mode adjuststhe transmission shift pattern toreduce shift cycling, providingincreased performance, vehiclecontrol, and transmission coolingwhen towing or hauling heavy loads.

Turn the Tow/Haul Mode on and offby pressing the button on theinstrument panel. When Tow/Haul ison, a light on the instrument clusterwill come on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light 0 111.

Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” underTowing Equipment 0 222.

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking isonly enabled while the Tow/HaulMode is selected and the vehicle isnot in the Range Selection Mode.See “Tow/Haul Mode” listedpreviously and Manual Mode 0 188.Tow/Haul Mode Grade Brakingassists in maintaining desiredvehicle speeds when driving ondownhill grades by using the engineand transmission to slow thevehicle.



To disable or enable Tow/Haul ModeGrade Braking within the currentignition key cycle, press and holdthe Tow/Haul button forthree seconds.

See Towing Equipment 0 222.

For other forms of grade braking,see Automatic Transmission 0 185and Cruise Control 0 194.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has an Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemay be heard while this test is goingon, and it may even be noticed thatthe brake pedal moves a little. Thisis normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Light0 110.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses the wheels areslowing down. If one of the wheelsis about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.



Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You may hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate. This isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal, then pushdown the parking brake pedal.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down. Pullthe handle, located just above theparking brake pedal, with theparking brake symbol, to release theparking brake.

If the ignition is on when the parkingbrake is released, the brake systemwarning light will go off.

Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear ordamage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips0 210.

Brake AssistThe Brake Assist feature isdesigned to assist the driver instopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates. TheBrake Assist feature willautomatically disengage when the



brake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)If equipped, this feature will preventthe vehicle from rolling when itattempts to move on a moderate tosteep hill. During the transition whenthe brake pedal is released and theaccelerator pedal is pressed, HSAuses braking pressure to hold thevehicle stationary for a few secondsdepending on the steepness of thehill. After this transition or after theaccelerator pedal is pressed, thebrake will automatically release.HSA only activates when the driverdoor is closed. HSA will not activatein a forward drive gear when facingdownhill, or in R (Reverse) whenfacing uphill. If the brake pedal isreleased and then reapplied whileHSA is activated, the brake pedalmay feel firmer with less pedaltravel.

Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC),an electronic stability controlsystem. These systems help limitwheel spin and assist the driver inmaintaining control, especially onslippery road conditions.

TCS activates if it senses any of thedrive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, TCS applies the brakes tothe spinning wheels and reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak/ESC activates when thevehicle senses a difference betweenthe intended path and the directionthe vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak/ESC selectively appliesbraking pressure to any one of thevehicle wheel brakes to assist the

driver in keeping the vehicle on theintended path. Trailer Sway Control(TSC) is also on automatically whenthe vehicle is started. See TrailerSway Control (TSC) 0 225.

If cruise control is being used andtraction control or StabiliTrak/ESCbegins to limit wheel spin, cruisecontrol will disengage. Cruisecontrol may be turned back on whenroad conditions allow.

Both systems come onautomatically when the vehicle isstarted and begins to move. Thesystems may be heard or felt whilethey are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. Thisis normal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn TCS off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 172and “Turning the Systems Off andOn” later in this section.



The indicator light for both systemsis in the instrument cluster. Thislight will:

. Flash when TCS is limitingwheel spin.

. Flash when StabiliTrak/ESC isactivated.

. Turn on and stay on when eithersystem is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC), andd comes on and stays on toindicate that the system is inactiveand is not assisting the driver inmaintaining control. The vehicle issafe to drive, but driving should beadjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

Drive the vehicle. If d comes onand stays on, the vehicle may needmore time to diagnose the problem.If the condition persists, see yourdealer.

Turning the Systems Offand On

Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.

To turn off only TCS, press andrelease g. The appropriatemessage will display in the DIC. Toturn TCS on again, press andrelease g.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin when gis pressed, the system will not turnoff until the wheels stop spinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak/ESC, press and hold g until the

StabiliTrak/ESC OFF light g comeson and stays on in the instrumentcluster, then release. Theappropriate message will display inthe DIC.



To turn TCS and StabiliTrak/ESC onagain, press and release g. TheStabiliTrak/ESC OFF light g in theinstrument cluster turns off.

StabiliTrak/ESC will automaticallyturn back on if the vehicle exceeds32 km/h (20 mph). TCS will remainoff until g is pressed or the ignitionis cycled off then on.

The vehicle has a Trailer SwayControl (TSC) feature and a HillStart Assist (HSA) feature.See Trailer Sway Control (TSC)0 225 or Hill Start Assist (HSA)0 192.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 230.

Locking Rear AxleVehicles with a locking rear axle cangive more traction on snow, mud,ice, sand, or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, butwhen traction is low, this feature willallow the rear wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle.

Cruise Control

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not usecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

If equipped with cruise control, aspeed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) ormore can be maintained withoutkeeping your foot on theaccelerator. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 40 km/h(25 mph).

If the Traction Control System (TCS)or StabiliTrak/Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system begins to limitwheel spin while using cruisecontrol, the cruise control



automatically disengages. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 192. When roadconditions allow you to safely use itagain, cruise control can be turnedback on.

If the brakes are applied, cruisecontrol disengages.

I : Press to turn cruise control onor off. The white indicator comes onin the instrument cluster whencruise control is turned on.

+RES : If there is a set speed inmemory, press briefly to resume thatspeed or press and hold to

accelerate. If cruise control isalready active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET− : Press briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease vehicle speed.

[ : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

IfI is on when not in use, theSET− or +RES button could getpressed and go into cruise when notdesired. KeepI off when cruise isnot being used.

To set a speed:

1. PressI to turn the cruisesystem on.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET−.

4. Remove your foot from theaccelerator.

The cruise control indicator on theinstrument cluster turns green aftercruise control has been set to thedesired speed. See InstrumentCluster 0 101.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied or [ is pressed, thecruise control is disengaged withouterasing the set speed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,briefly press +RES. The vehiclereturns to the previous set speed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Press and hold +RES until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly press+RES. For each press, the



vehicle goes about1 km/h (Metric display) or1 mph (English display) faster.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Driver Information Center(DIC) 0 114. The increment valueused depends on the unitsdisplayed.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Press and hold SET– until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in smallincrements, briefly press SET–.For each press, the vehicle goesabout 1 km/h (Metric display) or1 mph (English display) slower.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Driver Information Center(DIC) 0 114. The increment valueused depends on the unitsdisplayed.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise speed. Whilepressing the accelerator pedal orshortly following the release tooverride cruise control, brieflypressing SET– will result in cruiseset to the current vehicle speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends on the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,pressing the accelerator pedal maybe necessary to maintain vehiclespeed. When going downhill, CruiseGrade Braking helps maintain thedriver selected speed.

Cruise Grade Braking is enabledwhen the vehicle is started andcruise control is active. It assists inmaintaining driver selected speed

when driving on downhill grades byusing the engine and transmissionto slow the vehicle.

If the brake pedal is applied, cruisecontrol will disengage.

Ending Cruise Control

There are four ways to end cruisecontrol:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press [.

. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

. To turn off cruise control,pressI.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory ifI ispressed or if the vehicle isturned off.



Driver AssistanceSystemsThis vehicle may have features thatwork together to help avoid crashesor reduce crash damage whiledriving, backing, and parking. Readthis entire section before usingthese systems.

{ Warning

Do not rely on the DriverAssistance Systems. Thesesystems do not replace the needfor paying attention and drivingsafely. You may not hear or seealerts or warnings provided bythese systems. Failure to useproper care when driving mayresult in injury, death, or vehicledamage. See Defensive Driving0 166.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Under many conditions, thesesystems will not:

. Detect children,pedestrians, bicyclists,or animals.

. Detect vehicles or objectsoutside the area monitoredby the system.

. Work at all driving speeds.

. Warn you or provide youwith enough time to avoid acrash.

. Work under poor visibility orbad weather conditions.

. Work if the detection sensoris not cleaned or is coveredby ice, snow, mud, or dirt.

. Work if the detection sensoris covered up, such as witha sticker, magnet, or metalplate.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Work if the area surroundingthe detection sensor isdamaged or not properlyrepaired.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take actionand apply the brakes and/or steerthe vehicle to avoid crashes.

Audible Alert

Some driver assistance featuresalert the driver of obstacles bybeeping. To change the volume ofthe warning chime, see VehiclePersonalization 0 120.

Cleaning

Depending on vehicle options, keepthese areas of the vehicle clean toensure the best driver assistancefeature performance. DriverInformation Center (DIC) messagesmay display when the systems areunavailable or blocked.



. Front and rear bumpers and thearea below the bumpers

. Front grille and headlamps

. Front camera lens in the frontgrille or near the front emblem

. Front side and rear side panels

. Outside of the windshield in frontof the rearview mirrors

. Side camera lens on the bottomof the outside mirrors

. Rear side corner bumpers

. Rear Vision Camera above thelicense plate

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, the RVC system isdesigned to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view ofthe area behind the vehicle.

{ Warning

The camera(s) do not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,crossing traffic, animals, or anyother object outside of thecameras’ field of view, below the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

bumper, or under the vehicle.Shown distances may be differentfrom actual distances. Do notdrive or park the vehicle usingonly these camera(s). Alwayscheck behind and around thevehicle before driving. Failure touse proper care may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.

When the vehicle is on and shiftedinto R (Reverse), the video imageappears on the inside rearviewmirror. The video image disappearsafter the vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse).



RVC Location

The camera is next to the licenseplate.

1. View displayed by thecamera

1. View displayed by thecamera

2. Corners of the rear bumper

Displayed images may be further orcloser than they appear. The areadisplayed is limited and objects thatare close to either corner of thebumper or under the bumper do notdisplay.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The RVC system might not workproperly or display a clear image if:

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlamps is shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident. The position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

Troubleshooting

If the vehicle is in R (Reverse) anda blue screen is displayed in themirror and then the display shutsoff, see your dealer for service.

Park AssistIf equipped, the Rear Park Assist(RPA) system uses sensors on therear bumper to assist with parkingand avoiding objects while inR (Reverse).



{ Warning

The Park Assist system does notdetect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectsbelow the bumper or that are tooclose or too far from the vehicle.It is not available at speedsgreater than 8 km/h (5 mph). Toprevent injury, death, or vehicledamage, even with Park Assist,always check the area around thevehicle and check all mirrorsbefore backing.

How the System Works

RPA comes on automatically whenthe shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single beep soundsto indicate the system is working.

RPA operates only at speeds lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

An obstacle detection is indicatedby beeps. The time between beepsgets shorter as the vehicle

approaches the obstacle. Repeatedbeeps are heard when the distanceis less than 30 cm (12 in).

To be detected, objects must be atleast 25 cm (10 in) off the groundand below rear door level. Objectsmust also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) fromthe rear bumper. This distance maybe less during warmer or humidweather.

Turning the System On and Off

The system can be disabled throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See “Park Assist” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 114.

RPA defaults to the on setting eachtime the vehicle is started.

Turn RPA off when towing a trailer.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The following messages may bedisplayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARK ASSIST : If thismessage occurs, take the vehicle toyour dealer for repair.

PARK ASSIST OFF : This messageoccurs if the driver disables thesystem or if the vehicle is drivenabove 8 km/h (5 mph) inR (Reverse).

PARK ASST BLOCKED SEEOWNERS MANUAL : Thismessage can occur under thefollowing conditions:

. The sensors are not clean. Keepthe rear bumper free of mud,dirt, snow, ice, slush, and frost.The message may not clear untilfrost or ice has melted all aroundand inside the sensor.

. A trailer is attached to thevehicle, or a bicycle or an objecthanging out of the rear doorduring the current or last drivecycle. RPA will return to normaloperation after it is determinedthe object is removed. Thiscould take a few drive cycles.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.



Other conditions may affect systemperformance, such as vibrationsfrom a jackhammer or thecompression of air brakes on a verylarge truck.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, the FCA system mayhelp to avoid or reduce the harmcaused by front-end crashes. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead tooquickly, FCA provides a red flashingalert on the windshield and rapidlybeeps. FCA also lights an ambervisual alert if following anothervehicle much too closely.

FCA detects vehicles within adistance of approximately 60 m(197 ft) and operates at speedsabove 40 km/h (25 mph).

{ Warning

FCA is a warning system anddoes not apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving or

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provide awarning with enough time to helpavoid a crash. It also may notprovide any warning at all. FCAdoes not warn of pedestrians,animals, signs, guardrails,bridges, construction barrels,or other objects. Be ready to takeaction and apply the brakes. SeeDefensive Driving 0 166.

FCA can be disabled with the[button on the center stack.

Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

FCA warnings will not occur unlessthe FCA system detects a vehicleahead. When a vehicle is detected,the vehicle ahead indicator willdisplay green. Vehicles may not bedetected on curves, highway exitramps, or hills, due to poor visibility;or if a vehicle ahead is partiallyblocked by pedestrians or otherobjects. FCA will not detect anothervehicle ahead until it is completelyin the driving lane.

{ Warning

FCA does not provide a warningto help avoid a crash, unless itdetects a vehicle. FCA may notdetect a vehicle ahead if the FCAsensor is blocked by dirt, snow,or ice, or if the windshield isdamaged. It may also not detect avehicle on winding or hilly roads,or in conditions that can limitvisibility such as fog, rain,or snow, or if the headlamps orwindshield are not cleaned or in

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

proper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, and FCAsensors clean and in good repair.

Collision Alert

When your vehicle approachesanother detected vehicle too rapidly,the red FCA display will flash on thewindshield. Also, eight rapidhigh-pitched beeps will sound fromthe front. When this Collision Alertoccurs, the brake system mayprepare for driver braking to occurmore rapidly which can cause abrief, mild deceleration. Continue toapply the brake pedal as needed.Cruise control may be disengagedwhen the Collision Alert occurs.

Tailgating Alert

The vehicle ahead indicator willdisplay amber if following a detectedvehicle ahead much too closely.

Selecting the Alert Timing

The Collision Alert button is on thecenter stack. Press[ to set thealert timing to far, medium, near,or off. The first button press showsthe current control setting on theDIC. Additional button presses willchange this setting. The chosensetting will remain until it is changedand will affect both the CollisionAlert and the Tailgating Alertfeatures. The timing of both alertswill vary based on vehicle speed.The faster the vehicle speed, thefarther away the alert will occur.Consider traffic and weatherconditions when selecting the alert

timing. The range of selectable alerttimings may not be appropriate forall drivers and driving conditions.

Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may provide unnecessaryalerts to turning vehicles, vehicles inother lanes, objects that are notvehicles, or shadows. These alertsare normal operation and thevehicle does not need service.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, cleaning theoutside of the windshield area infront of the camera sensor maycorrect the issue.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, the SBZA system is alane-changing aid that assistsdrivers with avoiding crashes thatoccur with moving vehicles in theside blind zone (or spot) areas. TheSBZA warning display will light up in



the corresponding outside sidemirror and will flash if the turn signalis on.

{ Warning

SBZA does not alert the driver tovehicles rapidly approachingoutside of the side blind zones,pedestrians, bicyclists,or animals. It may not providealerts when changing lanes underall driving conditions. Failure touse proper care when changinglanes may result in injury, death,or vehicle damage. Beforemaking a lane change, alwayscheck mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and use the turnsignals.

SBZA Detection Zones

The SBZA sensor covers a zone ofapproximately one lane over fromboth sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m(11 ft). The height of the zone isapproximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. Thiszone starts at approximately themiddle of the vehicle and goes back8 m (26 ft).


The SBZA symbol lights up in theside mirrors when the systemdetects a moving vehicle in the nextlane over that is in the side blindzone. This indicates it may be

unsafe to change lanes. Beforemaking a lane change, check theSBZA display, check mirrors, glanceover your shoulder, and use the turnsignals.

Left Side MirrorDisplay

Right Side MirrorDisplay

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror SBZA displays willbriefly come on to indicate thesystem is operating. When thevehicle is in a forward gear, the leftor right side mirror display will lightup if a moving vehicle is detected inthat blind zone. If the turn signal isactivated in the same direction of adetected vehicle, this display willflash as an extra warning not tochange lanes.



SBZA can be disabled through theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Driver Information Center (DIC)0 114. If SBZA is disabled by thedriver, the SBZA mirror displays willnot light up.


SBZA displays may not come onwhen passing a vehicle quickly, fora stopped vehicle, or when towing atrailer. The SBZA detection zonesthat extend back from the side ofthe vehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed. Use cautionwhile changing lanes when towing atrailer. SBZA may alert to objectsattached to the vehicle, such as atrailer, bicycle, or object extendingout to either side of the vehicle. Thisis normal system operation; thevehicle does not need service.

SBZA may not always alert thedriver to vehicles in the side blindzone, especially in wet conditions.The system does not need to beserviced. The system may light updue to guardrails, signs, trees,

shrubs, and other non-movingobjects. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice.

SBZA may not operate when theSBZA sensors in the left or rightcorners of the rear bumper arecovered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. Forcleaning instructions, see "Washingthe Vehicle" under Exterior Care0 307. If the DIC displays thesystem unavailable message aftercleaning both sides of the vehicletoward the rear corners of thevehicle, see your dealer.

If the SBZA displays do not light upwhen vehicles are in the blind zoneand the system is clean, the systemmay need service. Take the vehicleto your dealer.

Radio Frequency Information


Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may provide an alert ifthe vehicle is crossing a lanewithout using a turn signal in thatdirection. LDW uses a camerasensor to detect the lane markingsat speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) orgreater.

{ Warning

The LDW system does not steerthe vehicle. The LDW systemmay not:

. Provide enough time toavoid a crash.

. Detect lane markings underpoor weather or visibilityconditions. This can occur ifthe windshield orheadlamps are blocked bydirt, snow, or ice; if they are

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

not in proper condition; or ifthe sun shines directly intothe camera.

. Detect road edges.

. Detect lanes on winding orhilly roads.

If LDW only detects lanemarkings on one side of the road,it will only warn you whendeparting the lane on the sidewhere it has detected a lanemarking. Always keep yourattention on the road andmaintain proper vehicle positionwithin the lane, or vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Always keep thewindshield, headlamps, andcamera sensors clean and ingood repair. Do not use LDW inbad weather conditions.


The LDW camera sensor is on thewindshield ahead of the rearviewmirror.

To turn LDW on and off, press @ onthe center stack. The controlindicator will light when LDW is on.

When LDW is on, @ is green ifLDW is available to warn of a lanedeparture. If the vehicle crosses adetected lane marking without usingthe turn signal in that direction, @changes to amber and flashes.Additionally, there will be threebeeps on the right or left, dependingon the lane departure direction.


The system may not detect lanes aswell when there are:

. Close vehicles ahead.

. Sudden lighting changes, suchas when driving through tunnels.

. Banked roads.

If the LDW system is not functioningproperly when lane markings areclearly visible, cleaning thewindshield may help.

LDW alerts may occur due to tarmarks, shadows, cracks in the road,temporary or construction lanemarkings, or other roadimperfections. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice. Turn LDW off if theseconditions continue.



Fuel

Top Tier FuelGM recommends the use of TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline to keepthe engine clean, reduce enginedeposits, and maintain optimalvehicle performance. Look for theTOP TIER Logo or seewww.toptiergas.com for a list of TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline marketersand applicable countries.

Recommended FuelFor diesel engine vehicles, see“Fuel for Diesel Engines” in theDuramax diesel supplement.

If the vehicle has a yellow fuel capor a yellow sticker on the fuel door,E85 or FlexFuel can be used. If thevehicle does not have a yellow fuelcap or yellow sticker, do not usegasoline with ethanol levels greaterthan 15% by volume. See E85 orFlexFuel 0 207.

Use regular unleaded gasolinemeeting ASTM specification D4814with a posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. Do not use gasoline with aposted octane rating of less than 87,as this may cause engine knock andwill lower fuel economy.

Prohibited Fuels

Caution

Do not use fuels with any of thefollowing conditions; doing somay damage the vehicle and voidits warranty:

. For vehicles that are notFlexFuel, fuel labeledgreater than 15% ethanol byvolume, such as mid-levelethanol blends (16–50%ethanol), E85, or FlexFuel.

. Fuel with any amount ofmethanol, methylal,ferrocene, and aniline.These fuels can corrodemetal fuel system parts ordamage plastic and rubberparts.

. Fuel containing metals suchas methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

(MMT), which can damagethe emissions controlsystem and spark plugs.

. Fuel with a posted octanerating of less than therecommended fuel. Usingthis fuel will lower fueleconomy and performance,and may decrease the life ofthe emissions catalyst.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesThe U.S., Canada, and Mexico postfuel octane ratings in anti-knockindex (AKI). For fuel not to use in aforeign country, see ProhibitedFuels 0 206.

Fuel AdditivesTOP TIER Detergent Gasoline ishighly recommended for use withyour vehicle. If your country doesnot have TOP TIER DetergentGasoline, add ACDelco Fuel

System Treatment Plus−Gasoline tothe vehicle’s gasoline fuel tank atevery oil change or 15,000 km(9,000 mi), whichever occurs first.TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline andACDelco Fuel System TreatmentPlus−Gasoline will help keep yourvehicle’s engine fuel deposit freeand performing optimally.

E85 or FlexFuelVehicles with a yellow fuel cap canuse either unleaded gasoline or fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).All other vehicles should use onlythe unleaded gasoline as describedin Recommended Fuel 0 206.

The use of E85 or FlexFuel isencouraged when the vehicle isdesigned to use it. E85 or FlexFuelis made from renewable sources.

To help locate fuel stations thatcarry E85 or FlexFuel, the U.S.Department of Energy has analternative fuel website. Seewww.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations.

E85 or FlexFuel should meet ASTMSpecification D 5798 or CAN/CGSB–3.512 in Canada. Do not usethe fuel if the ethanol content isgreater than 85%. Fuel mixtures thatdo not meet ASTM or CGSBspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on.

The starting characteristics of E85or FlexFuel make it unsuitable foruse when temperatures fall below−18 °C (0 °F). Use gasoline or addgasoline to the E85 or FlexFuel.

Because E85 or FlexFuel has lessenergy per liter (gallon) thangasoline, the vehicle will need to berefilled more often. See Filling theTank 0 208.

The only GM approved aftermarketadditive is ACDelco Fuel SystemTreatment Plus-FlexFuel. Follow theinstructions on the bottle for properuse. This product is available atyour GM dealer.



Caution

Some additives are notcompatible with E85 or FlexFueland can harm the vehicle's fuelsystem. Use only additivesapproved by GM for E85 orFlexFuel vehicles. Damagecaused by unapproved additiveswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Filling the Tank

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on thefuel pump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Avoid using electronicdevices while refueling.

. Do not re-enter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away fromthe fuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noiseto stop, then unscrew thecap all the way.

The fuel cap is behind a hinged fueldoor on the driver side of thevehicle.



If the vehicle has E85 fuel capability,the fuel cap will be yellow and statethat E85 or gasoline can be used.See E85 or FlexFuel 0 207.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.

{ Warning

Overfilling the fuel tank by morethan three clicks of a standard fillnozzle may cause:

. Vehicle performance issues,including engine stalling anddamage to the fuel system.

. Fuel spills.

. Potential fuel fires.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care 0 307.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. Make surethe cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp 0 108.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Caution

If a new fuel cap is needed, besure to get the right type of capfrom your dealer. The wrong typeof fuel cap may not fit properly,may cause the malfunction

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

indicator lamp to light, and coulddamage the fuel tank andemissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp 0 108.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Do not fill a container whileit is inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

. Bring the fill nozzle incontact with the inside ofthe fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle.Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Avoid using electronicdevices.

Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle to tow a trailer. Read theentire section before towing a trailer.

To tow a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle 0 305. To towthe vehicle behind another vehiclesuch as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing 0 305.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

{ Warning

You can lose control when towinga trailer if the correct equipment isnot used or the vehicle is notdriven properly. For example,if the trailer is too heavy or the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

trailer brakes are inadequate forthe load, the vehicle may not stopas expected. You and otherscould be seriously injured. Thevehicle may also be damaged,and the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Pull a trailer only if all the steps inthis section have been followed.Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailerwith the vehicle.

Driving with a Trailer

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability, and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these are



important for your safety and that ofyour passengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

When towing a trailer:

. Become familiar with and followall state and local laws thatapply to trailer towing. Theserequirements vary from state tostate.

. State laws may require the useof extended side view mirrors.Even if not required, you shouldinstall extended side viewmirrors if your visibility is limitedor restricted while towing.

. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500 mi) of vehicleuse to prevent damage to theengine, axle, or other parts.

. It is recommended to performthe first oil change before heavytowing.

. During the first 800 km (500 mi)of trailer towing, do not driveover 80 km/h (50 mph) and donot make starts at full throttle.

. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).Tow/Haul Mode is recommendedfor heavier trailers. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 189. If thetransmission downshifts toooften, a lower gear may beselected using Manual Mode.See Manual Mode 0 188.

If equipped, the following driverassistance features should beturned off when towing a trailer:

. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

. Super Cruise Control

. Lane Keep Assist (LKA)

. Park Assist

. Automatic Parking Assist (APA)

. Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB)

If equipped, the following driverassistance features should beturned to alert or off when towing atrailer:

. Forward Automatic BrakingSystem (FAB)

. Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

. Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)

If equipped with Lane Change Alert(LCA), the LCA detection zones thatextend back from the side of thevehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed. Use cautionwhile changing lanes when towing atrailer.

If equipped with Rear Cross TrafficAlert (RCTA), use caution whilebacking up when towing a trailer, asthe RCTA detection zones thatextend out from the back of thevehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed.

{ Warning

To prevent serious injury or deathfrom carbon monoxide (CO),when towing a trailer:

. Do not drive with theliftgate, trunk/hatch,or rear-most window open.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air.See “Climate ControlSystems” in the Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust 0 184.

Towing a trailer requires experience.The combination of the vehicle andtrailer is longer and not asresponsive as the vehicle itself. Getused to the handling and braking ofthe combination by driving on alevel road surface before driving onpublic roads.

The trailer structure, the tires, andthe brakes must be all be rated tocarry the intended cargo.Inadequate trailer equipment cancause the combination to operate in

an unexpected or unsafe manner.Before driving, inspect all trailerhitch parts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires, and mirrors. See TowingEquipment 0 222. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start thecombination moving and thenmanually apply the trailer brakecontroller to check the trailer brakeswork. During the trip, occasionallycheck that the cargo and trailer aresecure and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are working.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the stability controlsystem might be heard. The systemreacts to vehicle movement causedby the trailer, which mainly occursduring cornering. This is normalwhen towing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving without a trailer. This canhelp to avoid heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Thecombination of the vehicle andtrailer will not accelerate as quicklyand is much longer than the vehiclealone. It is necessary to go muchfarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane. Passon level roadways. Avoid passingon hills if possible.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move that hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.



Making Turns

Caution

Turn more slowly and make widerarcs when towing a trailer toprevent damage to your vehicle.Making very sharp turns couldcause the trailer to contact thevehicle.

Make wider turns than normal whentowing, so trailer will not go over softshoulders, over curbs, or strike roadsigns, trees, or other objects.Always signal turns well in advance.Do not steer or brake suddenly.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downhill grade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes may overheat and result inreduced braking efficiency.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shifts toooften under heavy loads and/or hillyconditions.

When towing at higher altitudes,engine coolant will boil at a lowertemperature than at lower altitudes.If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle could show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run, preferably onlevel ground, with the transmissionin P (Park) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating 0 248.

Parking on Hills

{ Warning

To prevent serious injury or death,always park your vehicle andtrailer on a level surface whenpossible.

When parking your vehicle and yourtrailer on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb iffacing downhill or into traffic iffacing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, gradually release thebrake pedal to allow the chocksto absorb the load of the trailer.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake andshift into P (Park).


Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brakepedal.

. Start the engine.

. Shift into a gear.

. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.



3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pickup and store the chocks

Launching and Retrievinga Boat

Backing the Trailer into the Water

{ Warning

. Have all passengers get outof the vehicle beforebacking onto the sloped partof the ramp. Lower thedriver and passenger sidewindows before backingonto the ramp. This willprovide a means of escapein the unlikely event thevehicle slides into the water.

. If the boat launch surface isslippery, have the driverremain in the vehicle withthe brake pedal appliedwhile the boat is beinglaunched. The boat launch

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

can be especially slippery atlow tide when part of theramp was previouslysubmerged at high tide. Donot back onto the ramp tolaunch the boat if you arenot sure the vehicle canmaintain traction.

. Do not move the vehicle ifsomeone is in the path ofthe trailer. Some parts of thetrailer might be underwaterand not visible to peoplewho are assisting inlaunching the boat.

Disconnect the wiring to the trailerbefore backing the trailer into thewater to prevent damage to theelectrical circuits on the trailer.Reconnect the wiring to the trailerafter removing the trailer from thewater. If the trailer has electricbrakes that can function when thetrailer is submerged, it might help to

leave the electrical trailer connectorattached to maintain trailer brakefunctionality while on the boat ramp.

To back the trailer into the water:

1. Slowly back down the boatramp until the boat is floating,but no further than necessary.

2. Press and hold the brakepedal, but do not shift intoP (Park) yet.

3. Have someone place chocksunder the front wheels of thevehicle.

4. Gradually release the brakepedal to allow the chocks toabsorb the load of the trailer.

5. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake andshift into P (Park). If equippedwith a manual transmission,turn off the engine and movethe shift lever into 1 (First) gear.




Pulling the Trailer from the Water

To pull the trailer from the water:

1. Press and hold the brakepedal.

2. Start the engine and shift intoa gear.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Let up on the brake pedal.

5. Drive slowly until the tires areclear of the chocks.

6. Stop and have someone pickup and store the chocks.

7. Slowly pull the trailer from thewater.

Caution

If the vehicle tires begin to spinand the vehicle begins to slidetoward the water, remove yourfoot from the accelerator pedaland apply the brake pedal. Seekhelp to have the vehicle towed upthe ramp.

Maintenance when TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when used to tow trailers. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 318. It isespecially important to check theautomatic transmission fluid, engineoil, axle lubricant, belts, coolingsystem, and brake system beforeand during each trip.

Check periodically that all nuts andbolts on the trailer hitch are tight.

Engine Cooling when TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheating0 248.

Trailer TowingIf equipped with a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

Caution

Towing a trailer improperly candamage the vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. To tow a trailercorrectly, follow the directions inthis section and see your dealerfor important information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability, and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.



Trailer Weight

{ Warning

Never exceed the towing capacityfor your vehicle.

Safe trailering requires monitoringthe weight, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature,dimensions of the front of the trailer,and how frequently the vehicle isused to tow a trailer.

Trailering Weight Ratings

When towing a trailer, the combinedweight of the vehicle, vehiclecontents, trailer, and trailer contentsmust be below all of the maximumweight ratings for the vehicle,including:

. GCWR: Gross Combined WeightRating

. GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating

. Maximum Trailer Weight Rating

. GAWR-RR: Gross Axle WeightRating-Rear

. Maximum Trailer Tongue WeightRating

See “Weight-Distributing HitchAdjustment” under TowingEquipment 0 222 to determine ifequalizer bars are required to obtainthe maximum trailer weight rating.

See “Trailer Brakes” under TowingEquipment 0 222 to determine ifbrakes are required based on yourtrailer's weight.

The only way to be sure the weightis not exceeding any of theseratings is to weigh the tow vehicleand trailer combination, fully loadedfor the trip, getting individualweights for each of these items.

{ Warning

You and others could be seriouslyinjured or killed if the trailer is tooheavy or the trailer brakes areinadequate for the load. The

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle may be damaged, and therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Only tow a trailer if all the steps inthis section have been followed.Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer.

Gross Combined WeightRating (GCWR)

GCWR is the total allowable weightof the completely loaded vehicleand trailer including any fuel,passengers, cargo, equipment, andaccessories. Do not exceed theGCWR for your vehicle. The GCWRfor the vehicle is on the Tow RatingChart following.

To check that the weight of thevehicle and trailer are within theGCWR for the vehicle, follow thesesteps:

1. Start with the curb weight fromthe Tow Rating Chart.



2. Add the weight of the trailerloaded with cargo and readyfor the trip.

3. Add the weight of allpassengers.

4. Add the weight of all cargo inthe vehicle.

5. Add the weight of hitchhardware such as a draw bar,ball, load equalizer bars,or sway bars.

6. Add the weight of anyaccessories or aftermarketequipment added to thevehicle.

The resulting weight cannot exceedthe GCWR value shown on the TowRating Chart.

The gross combined weight canalso be confirmed by weighing thetruck and trailer on a public scale.The truck and trailer should beloaded for the trip with passengersand cargo.

Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR)

For information about the vehicle'smaximum load capacity, see VehicleLoad Limits 0 172. When calculatingthe GVWR with a trailer attached,the trailer tongue weight must beincluded as part of the weight thevehicle is carrying.

Maximum Trailer Weight

The maximum trailer weight rating iscalculated assuming only the driveris in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment.The weight of additional optionalequipment, passengers, and cargoin the tow vehicle must besubtracted from the maximum trailerweight.

Use the Tow Rating Chart todetermine how much the trailer canweigh, based on the vehicle modeland options.



Tow Rating Chart

Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR (a)

G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase

4.3LV6 3.42 3 357 kg (7,400 lb) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) 7 258 kg (16,000 lb)

G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase

4.3LV6 3.42 3 220 kg (7,100 lb) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) 7 258 kg (16,000 lb)

G2500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase

4.3LV6 3.42 3 039 kg (6,700 lb) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 355 kg (9,600 lb) 7 258 kg (16,000 lb)

G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase

4.3LV6 3.42 3 357 kg (7,400 lb) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) 7 258 kg (16,000 lb)

G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase

4.3LV6 3.42 3 265 kg (7,200 lb) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) 7 258 kg (16,000 lb)

G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase

4.3LV6 3.42 3 039 kg (6,700 lb) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb)



Tow Rating Chart (cont'd)


6.0LV8 3.42 4 355 kg (9,600 lb) 7 258 kg (16,000 lb)

G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Long Wheelbase

4.3LV6 3.42 2 858 kg (6,300 lb) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 173 kg (9,200 lb) 7 258 kg (16,000 lb)

3500 Series Cutaway – 353 cm (139 in) Wheelbase

4.3LV6 3.42/3.73 (b) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42/3.73 (b) 7 258 kg (16,000 lb)


4.3LV6 3.42/3.73 (b) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42/3.73 (b) 7 258 kg (16,000 lb)

6.0LV8 4.10 (b) 8 618 kg (19,000 lb)

6.0LV8 4.10 (b) 9 072 kg (20,000 lb)


6.0LV8 3.42/3.73 (b) 7 258 kg (16,000 lb)

6.0LV8 4.10 (b) 8 618 kg (19,000 lb)

6.0LV8 4.10 (b) 9 072 kg (20,000 lb)



Tow Rating Chart (cont'd)


(a) The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversion. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.(b) Maximum Trailer Weight cannot be provided because total vehicle weight is unknown.

The bumper on this vehicle is notdesigned to tow a trailer.

Maximum Trailer TongueWeight Rating

The Maximum Trailer TongueWeight Rating is the allowabletrailer tongue weight that the vehiclecan support using a conventionaltrailer hitch. It may be necessary toreduce the overall trailer weight tostay within the maximum trailertongue weight rating while stillmaintaining the correct trailer loadbalance.

Do not exceed a maximum trailertongue weight of 454 kg (1,000 lb).



Vehicle Series Hitch Type Maximum Tongue Weight

2500/3500 Weight -Carrying

181 kg (400 lb)

2500/3500Weight -

Distributing454 kg (1,000 lb)

The trailer tongue weight contributesto the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW).GVW includes the curb weight ofyour vehicle, any passengers,cargo, equipment, and the trailertongue weight. Vehicle options,passengers, cargo, and equipmentreduce the maximum allowabletongue weight the vehicle can carry,which also reduces the maximumallowable trailer weight.

Trailer Load Balance

The correct trailer load balancemust be maintained to ensure trailerstability. Incorrect load balance is aleading cause of trailer sway.

The trailer tongue weight (1) shouldbe 10–15% of the loaded trailerweight (2). Some specific trailertypes, such as boat trailers, falloutside of this range. Always referto the trailer owner’s manual for therecommended trailer tongue weight

for each trailer. Never exceed themaximum loads for your vehicle,hitch, and trailer.

After loading the trailer, separatelyweigh the trailer and then the trailertongue and calculate the trailer loadbalance percentage to see if theweights and distribution areappropriate for your vehicle. If thetrailer weight is too high, it may bepossible to transfer some of thecargo into your vehicle. If the trailertongue weight is too high or too low,it may be possible to rearrangesome of the cargo inside of thetrailer.

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for yourvehicle. Use the shortest hitchextension available to position thehitch ball closer to your vehicle. This



will help reduce the effect of thetrailer tongue weight on the trailerhitch and the rear axle.

If a cargo carrier is used in thetrailer hitch receiver, choose acarrier that positions the load asclose to the vehicle as possible.Make sure the total weight,including the carrier, is no more thanhalf of the maximum allowabletongue weight for the vehicle or227 kg (500 lb), whichever is less.

Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR-RR)

The GAWR-RR is the total weightthat can be supported by the rearaxle of the vehicle. Do not exceedthe GAWR-RR for the vehicle, withthe tow vehicle and trailer fullyloaded for the trip including theweight of the trailer tongue. If usinga weight-distributing hitch, do notexceed the GAWR-RR beforeapplying the weight distributionspring bars.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or assistance.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

Always use the correct hitchequipment for your vehicle.Crosswinds, large trucks going by,and rough roads can affect thetrailer and the hitch.

Proper hitch equipment for yourvehicle helps maintain combinationcontrol. Many trailers can be towedusing a weight-carrying hitch whichhas a coupler latched to the hitchball, or a tow eye latched to a pintle

hook. Other trailers may require aweight-distributing hitch that usesspring bars to distribute the trailertongue weight between your vehicleand trailer axles. See “MaximumTrailer Tongue Weight Rating” underTrailer Towing 0 215 for weight limitswith various hitch types.

Never attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches. Only useframe-mounted hitches that do notattach to the bumper.

Consider using mechanical swaycontrols with any trailer. Ask atrailering professional about swaycontrols or refer to the trailermanufacturer's recommendationsand instructions.

Weight-Distributing HitchAdjustment

A weight distributing hitch may beuseful with some trailers.



1. Front of Vehicle2. Body to Ground Distance

When using a weight-distributinghitch, measure the front fenderheight distance (2) beforeconnecting the trailer. Adjust thespring bars until the front fenderheight distance (2) is the sameheight before the trailer wasconnected. Do not reduce the frontfender height below the initialdistance (2).

Tires. Do not tow a trailer while using a

compact spare tire on thevehicle.

. Tires must be properly inflated tosupport loads while towing atrailer. See Tires 0 269 forinstructions on proper tireinflation.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer, and attachthe chains to the holes on the trailerhitch platform. Instructions aboutsafety chains may be provided bythe hitch manufacturer or by thetrailer manufacturer.

Cross the safety chains under thetongue of the trailer to help preventthe tongue from contacting the roadif it becomes separated from thehitch. Always leave just enoughslack so the combination can turn.Never allow safety chains to drag onthe ground.

Trailer Brakes

Loaded trailers over 675 kg(1,500 lb) must be equipped withbrake systems and with brakes foreach axle. Trailer braking equipmentconforming to Canadian Standards

Association (CSA) requirementCAN3-D313, or its equivalent, isrecommended.

State or local regulations mayrequire trailers to have their ownbraking system if the loaded weightof the trailer exceeds certainminimums that can vary from stateto state. Read and follow theinstructions for the trailer brakes sothey are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly. Never attemptto tap into your vehicle's hydraulicbrake system. If you do, both thevehicle anti-lock brakes and thetrailer brakes may not function,which could result in a crash.

Trailer Wiring Harness

Basic Trailer Wiring

If the vehicle is not equipped with atrailer connector on the rear bumper,a seven-wire trailering harness istied to the vehicle’s frame. Theharness requires the installation of atrailer connector, which is availablethrough your dealer.



Use only a round, seven-wireconnector with flat blade terminalsmeeting SAE J2863 specificationsfor proper electrical connectivity.

The seven-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:

Stop/TurnSignal Left*

Yellow

Stop/TurnSignal Right*

Dark Green

Tail/ParkingLamps**

Brown

ReverseLamps**

Light Green

Battery Feed Red/Black

Ground White

Electric TrailerBrake

Dark Blue

*If the vehicle is a cutaway withtrailer provisions, a 15 amp fusewill be shared for both left/stoptrailer turn and right/stop trailerturn signals. However, thecutaway lighting connector willhave a 10 amp fuse for eachsignal.

**If the vehicle is a cutaway withtrailer provisions, a 15 amp fusewill be shared for trailer parklamps and cutaway rear lightingconnector park lamps. Also, a10 amp fuse will be shared fortrailer back-up lamps and cutawayrear lighting connector back-uplamps.

Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring HarnessPackage

lf equipped, the trailer wiringharness, with a seven-pin connectoris mounted on the trailer hitch.

1. Left Turn/Brake

2. Taillamps

3. Reverse Lamps

4. Battery Feed

5. Right Turn/Brake

6. Electric Brakes

7. Ground

Electric Brake Control WiringProvisions

If the vehicle is not equipped withan integrated trailer brake controller,and the trailer has electric brakes, atrailer brake controller needs to beinstalled on the vehicle. The brake



controller should be installed byyour dealer or a qualified servicecenter.

If equipped, wiring provisions for anaftermarket electric trailer brakecontroller are included with thevehicle as part of the trailer wiringpackage. The harness contains thefollowing circuits:

Electric TrailerBrakes

Dark Blue

Battery Feed Red/White

Brake ApplySignal

Light Blue

Ground Black

There are four blunt cut wires underthe floor carpeting in front of thebrake pedal. It will be necessary tohave a technician connect the12-volt power to the enginecompartment fuse block.

Refer to the aftermarket electrictrailer brake controller owner'smanual to determine wire colorcoding of the electric trailer brake

controller. The wire colors on thebrake controller may be differentfrom the vehicle.

Trailer Lamps

Always check all trailer lamps areworking at the beginning of eachtrip, and periodically on longer trips.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

When properly connected, the trailerturn signals will illuminate to indicatethe vehicle is turning, changinglanes, or stopping. When towing atrailer, the arrows on the instrumentcluster will illuminate even if thetrailer is not properly connected orthe bulbs are burned out.

Tow/Haul Mode

Tow/Haul assists when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavyload. For instructions on how toenter Tow/Haul mode, see Tow/HaulMode 0 189.

Tow/Haul Mode is designed to bemost effective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least

75% of the vehicle's GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).See “Trailer Weight” under TrailerTowing 0 215.

Tow/Haul Mode is most useful whentowing a heavy trailer or carrying alarge or heavy load:

. through rolling terrain

. in stop-and-go traffic

. in busy parking lots

Operating the vehicle in Tow/HaulMode when lightly loaded or nottowing will not cause damage;however, it is not recommended andmay result in unpleasant engine andtransmission driving characteristicsand reduced fuel economy.

Trailer SwayControl (TSC)Vehicles with StabiliTrak/ElectronicStability Control (ESC) have aTrailer Sway Control (TSC) feature.Trailer sway is unintendedside-to-side motion of a trailer whiletowing. If the vehicle is towing atrailer and the TSC detects that



sway is increasing, the vehiclebrakes are selectively applied ateach wheel, to help reduceexcessive trailer sway. If equippedwith the Integrated Trailer BrakeControl (ITBC) system, and thetrailer has an electric brake system,StabiliTrak/ESC may also apply thetrailer brakes.

If TSC is enabled, the TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak/ESC warning light will flash on theinstrument cluster. Reduce vehiclespeed by gradually removing yourfoot from the accelerator. If trailersway continues, StabiliTrak/ESC

can reduce engine torque to helpslow the vehicle. TSC will notfunction if StabiliTrak/ESC is turnedoff. See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 192.

{ Warning

Trailer sway can result in a crashand in serious injury or death,even if the vehicle is equippedwith TSC.

If the trailer begins to sway,reduce vehicle speed bygradually removing your foot fromthe accelerator. Then pull over tocheck the trailer and vehicle tohelp correct possible causes,including an improperly oroverloaded trailer, unrestrainedcargo, improper trailer hitchconfiguration, or improperlyinflated or incorrect vehicle ortrailer tires. See TowingEquipment 0 222 for trailer ratingsand hitch setuprecommendations.

Trailer Tires

Special Trailer (ST) tires differ fromvehicle tires. Trailer tires aredesigned with stiff sidewalls to helpprevent sway and to support heavyloads. These features can make itdifficult to determine if the trailer tirepressures are low only based on avisual inspection.

Always check all trailer tirepressures before each trip when thetires are cool. Low trailer tirepressure is a leading cause of trailertire blow-outs.

Trailer tires deteriorate over time.The trailer tire sidewall will show theweek and year the tire wasmanufactured. Many trailer tiremanufacturers recommendreplacing tires more than sixyears old.

Overloading is another leadingcause of trailer tire blow-outs. Neverload your trailer with more weightthan the tires are designed tosupport. The load rating is locatedon the trailer tire sidewall.



Always know the maximum speedrating for the trailer tires beforedriving. This may be significantlylower than the vehicle tire speedrating. The speed rating may be onthe trailer tire sidewall. If the speedrating is not shown, the defaulttrailer tire speed rating is 105 km/h(65 mph).

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Warning

The Data Link Connector (DLC) isused for vehicle service andEmission Inspection/Maintenancetesting. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp 0 108. A device connectedto the DLC — such as anaftermarket fleet ordriver-behavior tracking device —may interfere with vehiclesystems. This could affect vehicleoperation and cause a crash.Such devices may also accessinformation stored in the vehicle’ssystems.

Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work andwould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always checkwith your dealer before addingelectrical equipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle 0 70 and Adding Equipmentto the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle0 70.


228 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 229California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . . 230

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 237Automatic Transmission Fluid(6-Speed Transmission) . . . . . 238

Automatic Transmission Fluid(8-Speed Transmission) . . . . . 241

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . 242Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . 248Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . 249Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Battery - North America . . . . . . 253Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 254Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 256Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 257

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 257Windshield Replacement . . . . . 258Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,and Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . 260

Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . 261

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 262

Electrical SystemElectrical System Overload . . . 262Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 263Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Floor Console Fuse Block . . . . 267

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . 271Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Dual Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . 284When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287


Vehicle Care 229

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 288Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 300

Jump StartingJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 305Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 Warning

{ Warning

Most motor vehicles, includingthis one, as well as many of itsservice parts and fluids, containand/or emit chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts andsystems, many fluids, and somecomponent wear by-productscontain and/or emit thesechemicals. For more informationgo to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See Battery - North America 0 253and Jump Starting - North America0 301 and the back cover.


230 Vehicle Care

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non-dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to suspension componentscaused by modifying vehicle heightoutside of factory settings will not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non-GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 70.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner’s manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, seePublication Ordering Information0 343.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 70.


Vehicle Care 231

If equipped with remote vehiclestart, open the hood beforeperforming any service work toprevent remote starting the vehicleaccidentally. See Remote VehicleStart 0 29.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records 0 329.

Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is in front of the driverside door frame near the floor.

2. Go to the front of the vehicleand lift up the secondary hoodrelease, which is underneaththe middle of the hood.

3. Lift the hood, release the hoodprop from its retainer, and putthe hood prop into the slot inthe hood.

If the vehicle has an underhoodlamp, it will automatically come onand stay on until the hood is closed.

Before closing the hood, be sure allof the filler caps are on properly.Then lift the hood to relievepressure on the hood prop. Removethe hood prop from the slot in thehood and return the prop to itsretainer. Let the hood down andclose it firmly.


232 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

4.3L V6 Engine


Vehicle Care 233

1. Battery - North America 0 253.

2. Radiator Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System 0 243.

3. Coolant Recovery Tank. SeeCooling System 0 243.

4. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System0 243.

5. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 242.

6. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 235.

7. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 235.

8. Power Steering FluidReservoir. See Power SteeringFluid 0 249.

9. Engine Compartment FuseBlock 0 263.

10. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brake Fluid0 252.

11. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid0 250.


234 Vehicle Care

6.0L V8 Engine


Vehicle Care 235

1. Battery - North America 0 253.

2. Radiator Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System 0 243.

3. Coolant Recovery Tank. SeeCooling System 0 243.

4. Automatic Transmission FluidDipstick. See “Checking theFluid Level” under AutomaticTransmission Fluid (6-SpeedTransmission) 0 238 orAutomatic Transmission Fluid(8-Speed Transmission) 0 241.

5. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 235.

6. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 235.

7. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System0 243.

8. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 242.

9. Power Steering FluidReservoir. See Power SteeringFluid 0 249.

10. Engine Compartment FuseBlock 0 263.

11. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brake Fluid0 252.

12. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid0 250.

Engine OilFor diesel engine vehicles, see“Engine Oil” in the Duramax dieselsupplement.

To ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:

. Use engine oil approved to theproper specification and of theproper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System 0 237.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

Check the engine oil level regularly,every 650 km (400 mi), especiallyprior to a long trip. The engine oildipstick handle is a loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 232 for the location.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.


236 Vehicle Care

If a low oil Driver Information Center(DIC) message displays, check theoil level.

Follow these guidelines:

. To get an accurate reading, parkthe vehicle on level ground.Check the engine oil level afterthe engine has been off for atleast two hours. Checking theengine oil level on steep gradesor too soon after engine shutoffcan result in incorrect readings.Accuracy improves whenchecking a cold engine prior tostarting. Remove the dipstickand check the level.

. If unable to wait two hours, theengine must be off for at least15 minutes if the engine iswarm, or at least 30 minutes ifthe engine is not warm. Pull outthe dipstick, wipe it with a cleanpaper towel or cloth, then push itback in all the way. Remove itagain, keeping the tip down, andcheck the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

4.3L V6 Engine

6.0L V8 Engine

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick andthe engine has been off for at least15 minutes, add 1 L (1 qt) of therecommended oil and then recheckthe level. See “Selecting the RightEngine Oil” later in this section foran explanation of what kind of oil touse. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications 0 331.

Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If the oil level isabove the operating range (i.e.,the engine has so much oil thatthe oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that showsthe proper operating range), theengine could be damaged. Drainthe excess oil or limit driving ofthe vehicle, and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess oil.

See Engine Compartment Overview0 232 for the location of the engineoil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.


Vehicle Care 237

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 326.

Specification

Use full synthetic engine oils thatmeet the dexos1 specification.Engine oils that have beenapproved by GM as meeting thedexos1 specification are markedwith the dexos1 approved logo. Seewww.gmdexos.com.

Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil or equivalent can resultin engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Viscosity Grade

Use SAE 5W-30 viscosity gradeengine oil.

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29 °C(−20 °F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may beused. An oil of this viscosity gradewill provide easier cold starting forthe engine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selecting an oilof the appropriate viscosity grade, itis recommended to select an oil ofthe correct specification. See“Specification” earlier in this section.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils meeting thedexos1 specification are all that isneeded for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors which


238 Vehicle Care

include engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an engine oilchange is indicated can varyconsiderably. For the oil life systemto work properly, the system mustbe reset every time the oil ischanged.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change.

To reset the Engine Oil Life Systemon most models:


2. Press and hold V on the DICwhile the Oil Life display isactive. The oil life will changeto 100%.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:


2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds. If thedisplay shows 100%, thesystem is reset.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not reset. Repeat theprocedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid (6-SpeedTransmission)

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level. The onlyreason for fluid loss is atransmission leak or overheatedtransmission. If a small leak is


Vehicle Care 239

suspected, use the followingprocedures to check the fluid level.However, if there is a large leak, itmay be necessary to have thevehicle towed to a dealer and haveit repaired before driving the vehiclefurther.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule 0 318, and be sure to usethe transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 326.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Because this operation can bedifficult, it is recommended to havethis check done at your dealer,which can monitor the transmissiontemperature. The transmission fluidlevel increases with temperature. Toobtain a highly accurate fluid levelcheck, the transmission temperaturemust be measured.

If it is decided to check the fluidlevel, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or a false readingon the dipstick may occur.

Caution

Too much or too little fluid candamage the transmission. Toomuch can mean that some of thefluid could come out and fall onhot engine parts or exhaustsystem parts, starting a fire. Toolittle fluid could cause thetransmission to overheat. Be sureto get an accurate reading ifchecking the transmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes with theengine off, before checking thetransmission fluid level if the vehiclehas been driven:

. In hot weather, when outsidetemperatures are above 32 °C(90 °F).

. The vehicle is heavily loaded.

. At high speed for quite a while inhot weather.

. In heavy traffic and hot weather.

. While pulling a trailer.

After driving under these conditions,a hot check can be performed. Thefluid should be hot, which is 71 °C to93 °C (160 °F to 200 °F).

A cold fluid level check can beperformed after the vehicle hasbeen sitting for eight hours or morewith the engine off, but this is usedonly as a reference. Let the enginerun at idle for five minutes if theoutside temperature is between15 °C to 32 °C (60 °F to 90 °F).Should the fluid level be low duringthis cold check, the fluid must bechecked warm or hot before addingfluid. If the outside temperature iscolder than 15 °C (60 °F) or hotterthan 32 °C (90 °F), a cold checkcannot be performed.

A warm fluid level check can beperformed by driving the vehicleunder lightly loaded conditions andoutside temperatures between 10 °Cto 27 °C (50 °F to 80 °F). Thevehicle should be driven for at least24 km (15 mi) before performing awarm check. Checking the fluid


240 Vehicle Care

warm or hot will give a moreaccurate reading of the fluid levelthan a cold check.

Because the vehicle is equippedwith a high-efficiency air-to-oilcooler, the transmission fluidtemperature may not reach therequired hot fluid level checkingtemperature under normal lightlyloaded driving vehicle conditions.

Checking the Fluid Level

Prepare the vehicle:

1. Park the vehicle on a levelplace. Keep the enginerunning.

2. With the parking brake applied,place the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With a foot on the brake pedal,move the shift lever througheach gear range, pausing forabout three seconds in eachrange. When M is reached,move the selector from M1through M3. Then, position theshift lever in P (Park).

4. Let the engine run at idle fortwo minutes or more.

Then, without shutting off theengine, use the steps that follow.

The transmission dipstick is nearthe center of the enginecompartment and will be labeledwith the graphic shown.

See Engine Compartment Overview0 232 for more information onlocation.

1. COLD Range2. WARM Range3. HOT Range

1. Flip the handle up, pull out thedipstick, and wipe it with aclean rag or paper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, waitthree seconds, and pull it backout again.

3. Check both sides of thedipstick, and read the lowerlevel. The fluid level must be inthe COLD (1) range for a coldcheck, transmissiontemperature 27 °C to 32 °C(80 °F to 90 °F); between theCOLD (1) and HOT (3) rangefor a WARM (2) check, 50 °C to60 °C (122 °F to 140 °F); or inthe HOT (3) cross-hatchedrange for a hot check, 71 °C to93 °C (160 °F to 200 °F). Besure to keep the dipstickpointed down to get anaccurate reading.

4. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way;then flip the handle down tolock the dipstick in place.


Vehicle Care 241

How to Add AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 326 to determine whatkind of transmission fluid to use.

1. WARM Range2. HOT Range

Using a funnel, add fluid down thetransmission dipstick tube only afterchecking the transmission fluidwhile it is warm or hot. A cold checkis used only as a reference. If thefluid level is low, add only enough ofthe proper fluid to bring the level upto the middle of the WARM (1) orHOT (2) range depending on theambient temperature and priordriving conditions. Refer to “How toCheck Automatic TransmissionFluid” earlier in this section forinstructions on driving to achieve

warm or hot transmission fluid.It does not take much fluid,generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt). Donot overfill.

Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damagethe vehicle, and the damage maynot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use the correctautomatic transmission fluid. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 326.

. After adding fluid, recheck thefluid level as described under“How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid,” earlier inthis section.

. When the correct fluid level isobtained, push the dipstick backin all the way; then flip thehandle down to lock the dipstickin place.

Automatic TransmissionFluid (8-SpeedTransmission)

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level. The onlyreason for fluid loss is atransmission leak or overheatedtransmission. This vehicle is notequipped with a transmission fluidlevel dipstick. There is a specialprocedure for checking andchanging the transmission fluid inthese vehicles. Because thisprocedure is difficult, this should bedone at the dealer. Contact thedealer for additional information orthe procedure can be found in theservice manual. See PublicationOrdering Information 0 343.


242 Vehicle Care

Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damagethe vehicle, and the damage maynot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use the correctautomatic transmission fluid. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 326.

Change the fluid and filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule0 318. Be sure to use thetransmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 326.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe air cleaner/filter assembly is onthe front of the engine compartmenton the driver side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overview0 232.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

For intervals on changing andinspecting the engine air filter, seeMaintenance Schedule 0 318.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Do not start the engine or have theengine running with the engine airfilter housing open. Before removingthe engine air filter, make sure thatthe engine air filter housing andnearby components are free of dirtand debris. Remove the engine airfilter. Lightly tap and shake theengine air filter (away from thevehicle) to release dust and dirt.Inspect the engine air filter fordamage, and replace if damaged.Do not clean the engine air filter orcomponents with water orcompressed air.

4.3L V6 Engine

To inspect and replace the filter:

1. Remove the eight screws, slidethe top cover forward and lift,to gain access to the aircleaner/filter.

2. Remove the air cleaner/filterfrom the housing base. Takecare to dislodge as little dirt aspossible.

3. Clean the air cleaner/filtersealing surface andhousing base.

4. Install the engine air cleaner/filter in the housing base.


Vehicle Care 243

5. Install the top cover by sliding itinto position on the housingbase, and secure using eightscrews.

6.0L V8 Engine

1. Retaining Clips2. Housing Base3. Housing Cover

To inspect and replace the filter:

1. Unlock the two retainingclips (1) on the sides of thehousing cover (3) and on thehousing base (2) and pull thecover off.

2. Remove the air cleaner/filterfrom the housing base. Takecare to dislodge as little dirt aspossible.

3. Clean the air cleaner/filtersealing surface andhousing base.

4. Install the engine air cleaner/filter by aligning the arrow onone side of the air cleaner/filterend cap with the arrow on topof the housing base.

5. Install the housing cover byaligning the arrow on top of thecover to the arrow on top of thehousing base, and fasten thetwo retaining clips.

See Maintenance Schedule 0 318 todetermine when to replace theengine air cleaner/filter.

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. Use caution

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

when working on the engine. Donot start the engine or drive thevehicle with the air cleaner/filteroff, as flames may be present ifthe engine backfires.

Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.


244 Vehicle Care

4.3L V6 Engine

1. Radiator Pressure Cap2. Coolant Recovery Tank3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out

of View)

6.0L V8 Engine

1. Radiator Pressure Cap2. Coolant Recovery Tank3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out

of View)

{ Warning

An underhood electric fan canstart up even when the engine isnot running and can cause injury.Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhoodelectric fan.

{ Warning

Do not touch heater or radiatorhoses, or other engine parts.They can be very hot and canburn you. Do not run the engine ifthere is a leak; all coolant couldleak out. That could cause anengine fire and can burn you. Fixany leak before driving thevehicle.

Engine Coolant

The cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating 0 248.


Vehicle Care 245

What to Use

{ Warning

Plain water, or other liquids suchas alcohol, can boil before theproper coolant mixture will. Withplain water or the wrong mixture,the engine could get too hot butthere would not be an overheatwarning. The engine could catchfire and you or others could beburned.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:

. Gives freezing protection downto −37 °C (−34 °F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129 °C (265 °F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Caution

Do not use anything other than amix of DEX-COOL coolant thatmeets GM StandardGMW3420 and clean, drinkablewater. Anything else can causedamage to the engine coolingsystem and the vehicle, whichwould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant recovery tank. If thecoolant inside the coolant recoverytank is boiling, do not do anythingelse until it cools down. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not ator above the indicated mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant recovery tank, but be surethe cooling system is cool beforethis is done.

The coolant recovery tank cap hasthis symbol on it.


246 Vehicle Care

When the engine is cold, the coolantlevel should be at or above theCOLD FILL mark. If it is not, therecould be a leak in the coolingsystem.

If the coolant is low, add the coolantor take the vehicle to a dealer forservice.

How to Add Coolant to theRecovery Tank for GasolineEngines

{ Warning

Spilling coolant on hot engineparts can burn you. Coolantcontains ethylene glycol and it willburn if the engine parts are hotenough.

{ Warning

Plain water, or other liquids suchas alcohol, can boil before theproper coolant mixture will. Withplain water or the wrong mixture,the engine could get too hot butthere would not be an overheatwarning. The engine could catchfire and you or others could beburned.

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system are underpressure. Turning the pressurecap, even a little, can cause themto come out at high speed andyou could be burned. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andpressure cap to cool.

Caution

Failure to follow the specificcoolant fill procedure could causethe engine to overheat and couldcause system damage. If coolantis not visible in the surge tank,contact your dealer.

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture at thecoolant recovery tank.


Vehicle Care 247

How to Add Coolant to theRadiator

{ Warning


If coolant is needed, add the propermixture directly to the radiator, butbe sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.

1. Remove the radiator pressurecap when the cooling system,including the radiator pressurecap and upper radiator hose, isno longer hot. Turn thepressure cap slowlycounterclockwise until it firststops. Do not press down whileturning the pressure cap.

If a hiss is heard, wait for thatto stop. A hiss means there isstill some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure cap,but now push down as you turnit. Remove the pressure cap.

3. Fill the radiator with the propermixture, up to the base of thefiller neck. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 326 formore information about theproper coolant mixture.

4. Remove the coolant recoverytank cap and fill to the COLDFILL mark.

5. Reinstall the cap back on thecoolant recovery tank, butleave the radiator pressurecap off.

6. Start the engine and let it rununtil the upper radiator hosecan be felt getting hot. Watchout for the engine cooling fan.

7. By this time, the coolant levelinside the radiator filler neckmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the proper


248 Vehicle Care

mixture through the filler neckuntil the level reaches the baseof the filler neck.

8. Replace the pressure cap. Atany time during this procedureif coolant begins to flow out ofthe filler neck, reinstall thepressure cap.

Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and enginedamage may occur. Be sure thecap is properly and tightlysecured.

Engine OverheatingIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

Caution

Do not run the engine if there is aleak in the engine cooling system.This can cause a loss of allcoolant and can damage thesystem and vehicle. Have anyleaks fixed right away.

The vehicle has an indicator to warnof engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature gauge on the vehicle'sinstrument cluster. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge 0 104.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,but instead get service help rightaway, see Roadside AssistanceProgram 0 338.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, the fan

should be running. If it is not, do notcontinue to run the engine and havethe vehicle serviced.

See if the engine cooling fan speedincreases when idle speed isdoubled by pushing the acceleratorpedal down. If it does not, thevehicle needs service. Turn off theengine.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning



Vehicle Care 249

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:

. Climbs a long hill on a hot day

. Stops after high-speed driving

. Idles for long periods in traffic

. Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to thehighest temperature and to thehighest fan speed. Open thewindows as necessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the engine coolant temperaturegauge is no longer in the overheatzone or an overheat warning no

longer displays, the vehicle can bedriven. Continue to drive the vehicleslowly for about 10 minutes. Keep asafe vehicle distance from thevehicle in front. If the warning doesnot come back on, continue to drivenormally and have the coolingsystem checked for proper fill andfunction.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam,push down the accelerator until theengine speed is about twice as fastas normal idle speed for at leastthree minutes while parked. If thewarning is still on, turn off theengine until it cools down.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood, get service help right away.

Engine FanThe vehicle has a clutched enginecooling fan. When the clutch isengaged, the fan spins faster toprovide more air to cool the engine.In most everyday driving conditions,

the fan is spinning slower and theclutch is not fully engaged. Thisimproves fuel economy and reducesfan noise. Under heavy vehicleloading, trailer towing, and/or highoutside temperatures, the fan speedincreases as the clutch more fullyengages, so an increase in fannoise may be heard. This is normaland should not be mistaken as thetransmission slipping or makingextra shifts. It is merely the coolingsystem functioning properly. The fanwill slow down when additionalcooling is not required and theclutch partially disengages.

This fan noise may be heard whenstarting the engine. It will go awayas the fan clutch partiallydisengages.

Power Steering Fluid


250 Vehicle Care

The power steering fluid reservoir isin the engine compartment on thedriver side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 232 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessthere is a leak suspected in thesystem or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartmentcool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

4. Replace the cap andcompletely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again andlook at the fluid level on thedipstick.

The level should be at the COLDFILL mark. If necessary, add onlyenough fluid to bring the level up tothe mark.

To prevent contamination of brakefluid, never check or fill the powersteering reservoir with the brakemaster cylinder cover off.

What to Use

Caution

Use of the incorrect fluid maydamage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always usethe correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 326.

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 326. Always use the

proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks anddamage hoses and seals.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When the vehicle needs windshieldwasher fluid, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 232 forreservoir location.


Vehicle Care 251

Caution

. Do not use washer fluid thatcontains any type of waterrepellent coating. This cancause the wiper blades tochatter or skip.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in thewindshield washer. It candamage the windshieldwasher system and paint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause thesolution to freeze anddamage the washer fluidtank and other parts of thewasher system.

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters full whenit is very cold. This allows

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

for fluid expansion iffreezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it iscompletely full.

BrakesDisc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or canbe heard all the time when thevehicle is moving, except whenapplying the brake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 331.

Brake pads should be replaced ascomplete sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service may be required.


252 Vehicle Care

Replacing Brake System Parts

Always replace brake system partswith new, approved replacementparts. If this is not done, the brakesmay not work properly. The brakingperformance expected can changein many other ways if the wrongreplacement brake parts areinstalled or if parts are improperlyinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 232 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoir maygo down:

. Normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are installed, thefluid level goes back up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system. Have thebrake hydraulic system fixed.With a leak, the brakes will notwork well.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove fluid, asnecessary, only when work is doneon the brake hydraulic system.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight 0 109.

Brake fluid absorbs water over time.Replace brake fluid at the specifiedintervals to prevent increasedstopping distance. See MaintenanceSchedule 0 318.

Checking Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid by looking at thebrake fluid reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 232.


Vehicle Care 253

The fluid level should be aboveMIN. If it is not, have the brakehydraulic system checked to see ifthere is a leak.

After work is done on the brakehydraulic system, make sure thelevel is above MIN but not over theMAX mark.

What to Add

Use only GM approved DOT 3brake fluid from a clean, sealedcontainer. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 326.

{ Warning

The wrong or contaminated brakefluid could result in damage to thebrake system. This could result inthe loss of braking leading to apossible injury. Always use theproper GM approved brake fluid.

Caution

If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces, thepaint finish can be damaged.Immediately wash off any paintedsurface.

Battery - North AmericaThe original equipment battery ismaintenance free. Do not removethe cap and do not add fluid.

Refer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 232 for battery location.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer. WASH HANDS AFTERHANDLING. For more informationgo to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See California Proposition65 Warning 0 229 and the backcover.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you are

(Continued)


254 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

not careful. See Jump Starting -North America 0 301 for tips onworking around a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck rear axle fluid unless yoususpect there is a leak or you hearan unusual noise. A fluid loss couldindicate a problem. Have itinspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

For axles with the fill plug locatedon the back cover of the rear axle,the proper level is 15 mm to 40 mm(0.59 to 1.57 in) below the bottom ofthe fill hole.

For axles with the fill plug locatedon the passenger side of the rearaxle, the proper level is 0 mm to10 mm (0 to 0.4 in) below the bottomof the fill hole.

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 326 to determine whatkind of lubricant to use.

Noise Control System

Noise Emissions Warranty

General Motors warrants to the firstperson who purchases this vehiclefor purposes other than resale and


Vehicle Care 255

to each subsequent purchaser thatthis vehicle as manufactured byGeneral Motors, was designed, builtand equipped to conform at the timeit left General Motors’s control withall applicable U.S. EPA NoiseControl Regulations. This warrantycovers this vehicle as designed,built and equipped by GeneralMotors, and is not limited to anyparticular part, component orsystem of the vehicle manufacturedby General Motors. Defects indesign, assembly or in any part,component or system of the vehicleas manufactured by GeneralMotors, which, at the time it leftGeneral Motors’s control, causednoise emissions to exceed Federalstandards, are covered by thiswarranty for the life of the vehicle.

The following information relates tocompliance with federal noiseemission standards for vehicles witha Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg(10,000 lb). The MaintenanceSchedule provides information onmaintaining the noise control systemto minimize degradation of the noise

emission control system during thelife of the vehicle. The noise controlsystem warranty is given in thewarranty manual.

These standards apply only tovehicles sold in the United States.

TAMPERING WITH NOISECONTROL SYSTEMPROHIBITED

Federal law prohibits the followingacts or the causing thereof:

1. The removal or renderinginoperative by any person,other than for purposes ofmaintenance, repair,or replacement, of any deviceor element of designincorporated into any newvehicle for the purpose of noisecontrol prior to its sale ordelivery to the ultimatepurchaser or while it is inuse; or

2. The use of the vehicle aftersuch device or element ofdesign has been removed orrendered inoperative by anyperson.

Among those acts presumed toconstitute tampering are the actslisted below.

Insulation:

Removal of the noise shields or anyunderhood insulation.

Engine:

Removal or rendering the enginespeed governor, if equipped,inoperative so as to allow enginespeed to exceed manufacturerspecifications.

Fan and Drive:

. Removal of the fan clutch,if equipped, or rendering theclutch inoperative.

. Removal of the fan shroud,if equipped.


256 Vehicle Care

Air Intake:

. Removal of the air cleanersilencer.

. Modification of the air cleaner.

Exhaust:

. Removal of the muffler and/orresonator.

. Removal of the exhaust pipesand exhaust pipe clamps.

Fuel Operated Heater (FOH) -Diesel Engine:

. Removal of the muffler.

Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Apply both the parking brakeand the regular brake.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake. Beready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition offin each shift lever position.

. The ignition should turn to offonly when the shift lever is inP (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only when the ignition is off.


Vehicle Care 257

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.

. To check the parking brake'sholding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove foot

pressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.See Maintenance Schedule 0 318.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For proper type andlength, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts 0 328.

Caution

Allowing the wiper arm to touchthe windshield when no wiperblade is installed could damagethe windshield. Any damage thatoccurs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not allowthe wiper arm to touch thewindshield.

1. Lift the wiper arm away fromthe windshield.

2. Push the release lever (2) todisengage the hook and pushthe wiper arm (1) out of theblade assembly (3).


258 Vehicle Care

3. Push the new blade assemblysecurely on the wiper arm untilthe release lever clicks intoplace.

Windshield Replacement

Driver Assistance Systems

If the windshield needs to bereplaced and the vehicle isequipped with a front camera sensorfor the Driver Assistance Systems, aGM replacement windshield isrecommended. The replacementwindshield must be installedaccording to GM specifications forproper alignment. If it is not, thesesystems may not work properly, theymay display messages, or they maynot work at all. See your dealer forproper windshield replacement.

Gas Strut(s)This vehicle is equipped with gasstrut(s) to provide assistance inlifting and holding open the hood/trunk/liftgate system in full openposition.

{ Warning

If the gas struts that hold openthe hood, trunk, and/or liftgate fail,you or others could be seriouslyinjured. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service immediately.Visually inspect the gas struts forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage periodically. Check tomake sure the hood/trunk/liftgateis held open with enough force.If struts are failing to hold thehood/trunk/liftgate, do notoperate. Have the vehicleserviced.

Caution

Do not apply tape or hang anyobjects from gas struts. Also donot push down or pull on gasstruts. This may cause damage tothe vehicle.

See Maintenance Schedule 0 318.

Hood

Trunk


Vehicle Care 259

Liftgate

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, or any bulb changingprocedure not listed in this section,contact your dealer.

Caution

Do not replace incandescentbulbs with aftermarket LEDreplacement bulbs. This cancause damage to the vehicleelectrical system.

Halogen Bulbs

{ Warning

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.


260 Vehicle Care

Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, and ParkingLamps

1. Front Parking and TurnSignal Lamp

2. Front Sidemarker Lamp

To replace the front turn signal,sidemarker, and/or parking lampbulb(s):

1. Use a small tool to unlatch theoutboard clip on the lamp bypushing inboard and prying thelamp assembly forward.

2. Remove the lamp from thegrille.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise one-quarterturn and remove it from thelamp assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from thesocket by pulling it straight out.

5. Replace the bulb.

6. Turn the bulb socket clockwiseto reinstall it in the lampassembly.

7. Reinstall the lamp assemblyinto the grille until the outboardclip snaps into place.

TaillampsTo replace a taillamp/turn signallamp or back-up lamp bulb:

1. Remove the two inboard nutsfrom the inside of the taillampassembly.


Vehicle Care 261

2. The third nut (3) is under theapplique piece (2) above thelamp. Remove the two inboardapplique nuts. Pull theapplique (2) straight rearwardslightly to clear the studs. Thenrotate the applique (2) just farenough to gain access to theouter push pins (1).

3. Carefully disconnect the pushpins (1) from the appliquebracket.

4. Remove the third nut (3) fromthe upper outboard side ofthe lamp.

5. Remove the taillamp assemblyfrom the vehicle.

6. Remove the taillamp/turn signallamp (1) or back-up lamp (2)bulb socket by turning itcounterclockwise one-quarterturn and pulling it out of thelamp assembly.

7. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out.

8. Push the new bulb into thesocket.

9. Reinstall the bulb socket byturning it clockwise into thelamp assembly.

10. Reverse Steps 1–5 to reinstallthe taillamp assembly andapplique.

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)The Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) is above the rear doors atthe center of the vehicle.

To replace a bulb:

1. Remove the two screws fromthe CHMSL assembly.

2. Remove the CHMSL assembly.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise one-quarterturn to remove it from the lampassembly.


262 Vehicle Care

4. Pull the old bulb straight out ofthe socket and push the newbulb into the socket.

5. Turn the bulb socket clockwiseone-quarter turn to install it inthe lamp assembly.

6. Reinstall the CHMSL assemblyand two screws.

Do not block or damage the CHMSLwhen items are loaded on the roofof the vehicle.

License Plate Lamp

1. Bulb Socket

2. License Plate BulbAssembly

3. Screws

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the screws (3) thatsecure the license plate bulbassembly (2).

2. Turn the bulb socket (1)counterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.

3. Install the new bulb.

4. Reverse Steps 1 and 2 toreinstall the license plate bulbassembly.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.


Vehicle Care 263

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electricalproblems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe fuse block is in the enginecompartment on the driver side ofthe vehicle.

Vehicles with Upfitter Content

See www.gmupfitter.com for upfitterprovisions and best practices.

Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep thecovers on any electricalcomponent.


264 Vehicle Care

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

1 ABS motor

2 ABS module

Fuses Usage

3 Right trailerstoplamp/Turnsignal lamp

4 –

5 –

6 Fuel system controlmodule/Ignition

7 Body controlmodule 5



10 Instrument cluster

11 Trailer wiring

12 –

13 Interior rear visioncamera module

14 Windshield washer

16 Horn

17 Transmission

18 A/C


Vehicle Care 265

Fuses Usage

19 Engine controlmodule battery

20 Cutaway/Leftstoplamp/Turnsignal lamp

21 Left trailerstoplamp/Turnsignal lamp

22 Cutaway/Rightstoplamp/Turnsignal lamp

23 –

24 Fuel pump

25 Auxiliary poweroutlet


27 Special equipmentoption

28 Airbag

29 Steering wheelsensor

Fuses Usage

30 Engine controlmodule/Ignition

31 Transmissioncontrol moduleIgnition

32 Transmissioncontrol module 1battery

33 Rear parking aidmodule

34 –

35 –

36 Fuel system controlmodule battery

41 Transmissioncontrol 2 modulebattery power

42 Trailer wiring

43 –

44 Starter solenoid

45 Engine controlmodule/Powertrain

46 AC DC inverter

Fuses Usage

47 –

51 Left high-beamheadlamp

52 Right high-beamheadlamp

53 Left low-beamheadlamp

54 Right low-beamheadlamp

55 Wipers

56 Canister ventsolenoid



61 Engine oil solenoid

62 O2 sensor 2

63 –

64 Mass airflow/Canister vent


266 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

65 Ignition/Injectors– odd

66 Daytime runninglamps 2

67 Daytime runninglamps 1

68 Auxiliary stoplamps

69 External power fortrailer

70 Upfitter stoplamps

71 Fuel heater/FlexFuel sensor


73 Lighter/Data linkconnector

74 Front blower

75 Engine controlmodule diesel

76 –

77 O2 sensor 1

Fuses Usage

78 Engine controlmodule/Powertrain

79 Ignition/Injectors– even

Relays Usage

15 Run/Crank

37 –

38 Fuel pump

39 Crank

40 A/C compressor

48 –

49 Powertrain

50 –

57 –

60 –

Auxiliary Fuse Block

This component is near the fuseblock in the engine compartment

Fuses Usage

MR-1 Upfitter 1

MR-2 Upfitter 2

MR-3 Upfitter powercontrol

Relays Usage

MR Rel 1 Upfitter 1

MR Rel 2 Upfitter 2


Vehicle Care 267

Mega Fuse Holder

Fuse Usage

1 Starter motor

Floor Console Fuse BlockThe floor console fuse block is under the driver seat.


268 Vehicle Care

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Mini-Fuses Usage

F1 –

F2 Steering wheelsensor

F3 Auxiliary parkinglamps

F4 Front parkinglamps

F5 Trailer parkinglamps

F6 Upfitter/Parkinglamps

F7 Right rearparking lamp

F8 Left rearparking lamp

F9 Exterior rear mirrorswitch/ Doorlock-unlock controlupfitter/Frontcamera module

Mini-Fuses Usage

F10 Airbag/Automaticoccupant sensing

F11 – /OnStar

F12 ECM batt V6 gas

F13 HVAC 2

F14 HVAC 1

F15 –

F16 Upfitter 1

F17 Heated outsidemirrors

F18 Rear windowdefogger

F19 Compass

F20 Radio/Chime/SiriusXM satelliteradio

F21 Remote functionactuator/Tirepressure monitor

F22 Ignition switch/Discrete logicignition sensor

Mini-Fuses Usage

F23 Instrument cluster

F24 –

F25 HVAC control

F26 Auxiliary/Trailerreverse lamps

F27 Reverse lamps

F28 Upfitter 2/Readinglamps

F29 Rear blower

F30 Upfitter/Courtesylamps

F31 Front door lock

F32 Rear door lock

F33 Cargo door unlock

F34 Passenger doorunlock

F35 Rear passengerdoor unlock

F36 Driver door lock

F37 –

F38 –


Vehicle Care 269

Relays Usage

K1 Run

K2 –

K3 Parking lamps

K4 Upfitter 2

K5 Rear windowdefogger

K6 Retainedaccessory power

CircuitBreakers

Usage

CB1 Power seats

CB2 Power windows

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too muchflexing. There could be ablowout and a seriouscrash. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 172.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires aremore likely to be cut,punctured, or broken bya sudden impact — suchas when hitting a pothole.Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If thetread is badly worn,replace them.

(Continued)


270 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overall

performance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires 0 270.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on ice or snow covered

roads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires 0 285.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:

. Use tires of the same brand andtread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.


Vehicle Care 271

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into the sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger and light truck tiresidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric)/Spare Tire

(1) Tire Size : The tire size codeis a combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification) : Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation) : TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture : The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the third

week of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) : Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform TireQuality Grading 0 287.


272 Vehicle Care

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit : Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressure0 277 and Vehicle Load Limits0 172.

(8) Temporary Use Only : Onlyuse a temporary spare tire untilthe road tire is repaired andreplaced. This spare tire shouldnot be driven on over 112 km/h(70 mph), or 88 km/h (55 mph)when pulling a trailer, with theproper inflation pressure. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire 0 300.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

(1) Tire Size : The tire size codeis a combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification) : Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specification

code molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) Dual Tire Maximum Load :Maximum load that can becarried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used in a dualconfiguration. For information onrecommended tire pressure seeTire Pressure 0 277 and VehicleLoad Limits 0 172.

(4) DOT (Department ofTransportation) : TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture : The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week


Vehicle Care 273

(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(5) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(6) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(7) Single Tire MaximumLoad : Maximum load that canbe carried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used as a single. Forinformation on recommended

tire pressure see Tire Pressure0 277 and Vehicle Load Limits0 172.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The examples show a typicalpassenger vehicle and lighttruck tire size.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire :The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width : The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem C of the tire illustration, itwould mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as high asit is wide.

(4) Construction Code : A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.


274 Vehicle Care

(6) Service Description : Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

(1) Light Truck (LT-Metric)Tire : The United States versionof a metric tire sizing system.The letters LT as the first twocharacters in the tire size meana light truck tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width : The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem 3 of the light truck(LT-Metric) tire illustration, itwould mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as high asit is wide.

(4) Construction Code : A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Load Range : Load Range.

(7) Service Description : Theservice description indicates theload index and speed rating of atire. If two numbers are given asin the example, 120/116, thenthis represents the load index forsingle versus dual wheel usage(single/dual). The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire iscertified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure : The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight : Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.


Vehicle Care 275

Aspect Ratio : The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt : A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead : The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure : Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressure0 277.

Curb Weight : The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings : A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR : Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limits0 172.

GAWR FRT : Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 172.

GAWR RR : Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 172.

Intended Outboard Sidewall :The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa) : The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index : An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure :The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.


276 Vehicle Care

Maximum Load Rating : Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight : The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight : Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 172.

Occupant Distribution :Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall : Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is

higher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure : Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard.See Tire Pressure 0 277 andVehicle Load Limits 0 172.

Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim : A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall : The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating : Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction : The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread : The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators : Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires0 284.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards) : A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers using


Vehicle Care 277

government testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading 0 287.

Vehicle Capacity Weight : Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 172.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire : Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard : A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits 0 172.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

{ Warning

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits 0 172. How thevehicle is loaded affects vehiclehandling and ride comfort. Never


278 Vehicle Care

load the vehicle with moreweight than it was designed tocarry.

When to Check

Check the pressure of the tiresonce a month or more.

Do not forget the spare tire,if the vehicle has one. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire 0 300 foradditional information.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressure

matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems to keep out dirt andmoisture and prevent leaks. Useonly valve caps designed for thevehicle by GM. TPMS sensorscould be damaged and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressure

levels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tire


Vehicle Care 279

causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 279.


Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors are

mounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 172.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on at


280 Vehicle Care

each ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. If the vehicle has DICbuttons, tire pressure levels can beviewed. For additional informationand details about the DIC operationand displays, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 114.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 172, for an example of theTire and Loading Information labeland its location. Also see TirePressure 0 277.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tire

maintenance. See Tire Inspection0 282, Tire Rotation 0 282 and Tires0 269.

Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage also displays. The

malfunction light and DIC warningmessage come on at each ignitioncycle until the problem is corrected.Some of the conditions that cancause these to come on are:

. One of the road tires has beenreplaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC messageshould go off after the road tireis replaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DIC


Vehicle Care 281

message should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires 0 285.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire pressure condition. Seeyour dealer for service if the TPMSmalfunction light and DIC messagecome on and stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a new

tire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. Also,the TPMS sensor matching processshould be performed after replacinga spare tire with a road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool. A TPMSrelearn tool can also be purchased.See Tire Pressure Monitor SensorActivation Tool atwww.gmtoolsandequipment.com orcall 1-800-GM TOOLS(1-800-468-6657).

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition on withoutstarting the vehicle. SeeIgnition Positions 0 176.

3. Press the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter's Qand K buttons at the sametime for approximatelyfive seconds. The horn soundstwice to signal the receiver is inrelearn mode and TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

If the vehicle does not haveRKE, press the DriverInformation Center (DIC)vehicle information button untilthe PRESS V TO RELEARNTIRE POSITIONS messagedisplays. The horn soundstwice to signal the receiver is inrelearn mode and TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.


282 Vehicle Care

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

5. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

6. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 5. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

9. Turn the vehicle off.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:

. The indicators at three ormore places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 318.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheelalignment.See When It Is Time for NewTires 0 284 and WheelReplacement 0 288.


Vehicle Care 283

If the full-size spare tire is part ofthe tire rotation, make sure thetire rotated into the spareposition is stored securely.Push, pull, and then try to rotateor turn the tire. If it moves, usethe wheel wrench/hoist shaft totighten the cable. See TireChanging 0 291.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires if the vehiclehas single rear wheels.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires if the vehiclehas dual rear wheels.

When installing dual wheels,check that the vent holes in theinner and outer wheels on eachside are lined up.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated.See Tire Pressure 0 277 andVehicle Load Limits 0 172.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation 0 279.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications 0 331.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause a crash. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosion


284 Vehicle Care

or rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

Dual Tire RotationWhen the vehicle is new,or whenever a wheel, wheel bolt,or wheel nut is replaced or serviced,check the wheel nut torque after160, 1 600, and 10 000 km (100,1,000, and 6,000 mi) of driving. Forproper torque and wheel nuttightening information, see“Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire” under TireChanging 0 291 and “Wheel NutTorque” under Capacities andSpecifications 0 331.

The outer tire on a dual wheel setupgenerally wears faster than theinner tire. Tires last longer and wearmore evenly if they are rotated.See Tire Inspection 0 282 and TireRotation 0 282. Also seeMaintenance Schedule 0 318.

See Tires 0 269 and Tire Pressure0 277 for more information onproper tire inflation.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors, such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. Some

commercial truck tires may not havetreadwear indicators.See Tire Inspection 0 282 and TireRotation 0 282 for additionalinformation.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare ifequipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Toidentify the age of a tire, use the tiremanufacture date which is the lastfour digits of the DOT TireIdentification Number (TIN) which ismolded into one side of the tiresidewall. The first two digitsrepresent the week (01-52) and thelast two digits, the year. Forexample, the third week of the year2010 would have a four-digit DOTdate of 0310.


Vehicle Care 285

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,

GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 271 for additionalinformation.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four (sixfor dual rear wheels). Uniformtread depth on all tires will helpto maintain the performance ofthe vehicle. Braking and

handling performance may beadversely affected if all the tiresare not replaced at the sametime. If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires (six for dual rearwheels) should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation 0 282 for informationon proper tire rotation. However,if it is necessary to replace onlyone axle set of worn tires, placethe new tires on the rear axle(two for single rear wheels, fourfor dual rear wheels).

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.


286 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed rated

tires. Never exceed the wintertires’ maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem 0 278.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits0 172 for the label location andmore information about the Tireand Loading Information label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systems

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 287

Warning (Continued)

developed for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires 0 285 andAccessories and Modifications0 230.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingThe following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,

compact spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

Quality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on


288 Vehicle Care

specified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level of

performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear or the

vehicle is significantly pulling to oneside or the other. Some slight pull tothe left or right, depending on thecrown of the road and/or other roadsurface variations such as troughsor ruts, is normal. If the vehicle isvibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.


Vehicle Care 289

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicleground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ Warning

Tire chains used on a vehiclewithout the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage tothe brakes, suspension, or othervehicle parts. The area damagedby the tire chains could cause youto lose control of the vehicle andyou or others may be injured in acrash. To help avoid damage to

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the vehicle, drive slowly, readjust,or remove the device if it iscontacting the vehicle. Do notspin the vehicle's tires. Follow themanufacturer's instructions.

Caution

Use tire chains only where legaland only when necessary. Usechains that are the proper size forthe tires. Install them on the tiresof the rear axle. Do not usechains on the tires of the frontaxle. Tighten them as tightly aspossible with the ends securelyfastened. Drive slowly and followthe chain manufacturer'sinstructions. If the chains contactthe vehicle, stop and retightenthem. If the contact continues,slow down until it stops. Driving

(Continued)


290 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

too fast or spinning the wheelswith chains on will damage thevehicle.

For Cutaway models with LT245/75R16 or LT225/75R16 size singleor dual rear tires, use Low ProfileZ-Chain or SAE Class S cables.

For Cargo or Passenger modelswith LT225/75R16 or LT245/75R16size tires, use Low Profile Z-Chaincables. SAE Class S chains are notrecommended.

If the vehicle has dual rear tires, donot use individual tire chains. Usetire chains that fit across both dualtires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tires0 269. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly.

But if there ever is a blowout, hereare a few tips about what to expectand what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severely

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

underinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.


Vehicle Care 291

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers 0 128.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

5. Place wheel blocks,if equipped, on both sides ofthe tire at the oppositecorner of the tire beingchanged.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (1), if equipped.

1. Wheel Block (If Equipped)2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

Equipment needed for a cargo vanor a passenger van is in thepassenger side rear corner of thevehicle.

Remove the retaining wing bolt andlift it off of the mounting bracket.

Equipment needed for a15-passenger seating arrangementis secured on the rear floor on thepassenger side of the vehicle.


292 Vehicle Care

Remove the retaining wing bolt andlift it out of the mounting bracket toaccess the equipment.

The tools you will be using include:

1. Jack2. Hoist Handle3. Extension(s)4. Wheel Wrench5. Jack Handle

The spare tire is mounted in the rearunderbody of the vehicle.

Use the hoist handle, extension(s),and the wheel wrench to remove theunderbody-mounted spare tire.

To lower the spare tire from thevehicle:

1. Spare Tire2. Tire/Wheel Retainer3. Hoist Cable4. Hoist Assembly5. Hoist Shaft6. Hoist Handle and

Extension(s)7. Wheel Wrench


Vehicle Care 293

1. Assemble the wheel wrench (7)to the hoist handle and theextension(s) (6).

2. Open the passenger siderear door.

3. Insert the chisel end of thehoist handle, on an angle,through the hole in the rearfloor panel above the bumper.

Be sure the hoist handleconnects to the hoist shaft. Thechiseled end of the hoisthandle is used to lower thespare tire.

4. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.Continue to turn the wheelwrench until the spare tire canbe pulled out from under thevehicle.

5. Pull the spare tire out fromunder the vehicle.

6. Tilt the tire toward the vehiclewith some slack in the cable toaccess the tire/wheel retainer.

Tilt the retainer and pull itthrough the center of the wheelalong with the cable andspring.

For a vehicle that wascompleted from a cab andchassis, refer to the informationfrom the body supplier/installer.

The spare tire is a full-size tire,like the other tires on thevehicle.

7. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.

8. Close the passenger siderear door.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

If the vehicle has plastic wheel nutcaps, loosen them by turning thewheel wrench counterclockwise.The wheel nut caps are designed toremain with the center cap. Removethe center cap.

If the wheel has a smooth centerpiece, place the chisel end of thewheel wrench in the slot on thewheel and gently pry it out.


294 Vehicle Care

1. Jack2. Hoist Handle3. Extension(s)4. Wheel Wrench5. Jack Handle

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat 0 290.

2. Loosen all the wheel nuts withthe wheel wrench. Do notremove them yet.

3. Assemble the jack and tools:

Front Flat: Assemble thejack (1) together with the jackhandle (5), one or twoextension(s) (3), and the wheelwrench (4).

Rear Flat: Assemble thejack (1) together with the jackhandle (5), two extensions (3),and the wheel wrench (4).

Front Position

Front Position

Rear Position


Vehicle Care 295

Rear Alternative Position (DieselVehicles)

4. Position the jack under thevehicle, as shown.

The front position jacking pointis on the frame. The rearposition jacking point is on therear axle.

If the exhaust system interfereswith the jack location in therear axle, such as in Dieselvehicles, place the jack (1) onthe rear axle between the axlehousing and the shock

absorber bracket in order toavoid any interference with theexhaust pipe (2).

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack you couldbe badly injured or killed. Neverget under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

5. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the vehicle.Raise the vehicle far enough

off the ground so there isenough room for the spare tireto fit.

6. Remove all the wheel nuts.

7. Take the flat tire off of themounting surface.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause a crash. When

(Continued)


296 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

changing a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

8. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

9. Put the wheel nuts back onwith the rounded end of thenuts toward the wheel. Tighteneach wheel nut by hand untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

10. Turn the jack handlecounterclockwise to lower thevehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are not tight canwork loose. If all the nuts on awheel come off, the wheel cancome off the vehicle, causing acrash. All wheel nuts must beproperly tightened. Follow therules in this section to be surethey are.

{ Warning

If wheel studs are damaged, theycan break. If all the studs on awheel broke, the wheel couldcome off and cause a crash.If any stud is damaged becauseof a loose-running wheel, it couldbe that all of the studs aredamaged. To be sure, replace all

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 297

Warning (Continued)

studs on the wheel. If the studholes in a wheel have becomelarger, the wheel could collapse inoperation. Replace any wheel ifits stud holes have become largeror distorted in any way. Inspecthubs and hub‐piloted wheels fordamage. Because of looserunning wheels, piloting paddamage may occur and requirereplacement of the entire hub, forproper centering of the wheels.When replacing studs, hubs,wheel nuts or wheels, be sure touse GM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrench

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

to the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 331 for originalequipment wheel nut torquespecifications.

Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the propersequence and to the propertorque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications0 331 for the wheel nut torquespecification.

11. Use the wheel wrench totighten the nuts firmly. Turn thewheel wrench clockwise and ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

12. Put the wheel cover or thecenter cap and plastic wheelnut caps back on. Remove anywheel blocks.

Have a technician check thewheel nut tightness of allwheels with a torque wrenchafter the first 160 km (100 mi)and then 1 600 km (1,000 mi)after that. Repeat this servicewhenever a tire is removed or


298 Vehicle Care

serviced. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 331 for moreinformation.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

{ Warning

Failure to follow these tire storageinstructions carefully could resultin personal injury or propertydamage if the hoist cable fails orif the tire comes loose. Make surethe tire is stored securely beforedriving.

Caution

The tire hoist can be damaged ifthere is no tension on the cablewhen using it. To have thenecessary tension, the spare orroad tire and wheel assemblymust be installed on the tire hoistto use it.

{ Warning

An improperly stored spare tirecould come loose and cause acrash. To avoid personal injury orproperty damage, always storethe spare tire when the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Store the tire under the rear of thevehicle in the spare tire carrier.

1. Spare Tire2. Tire/Wheel Retainer3. Hoist Cable4. Hoist Assembly5. Hoist Shaft6. Hoist Handle and

Extension(s)7. Wheel Wrench

1. Put the tire on the ground atthe rear of the vehicle with thevalve stem pointed down, andto the rear.


Vehicle Care 299

2. Pull the cable and springthrough the center of thewheel. Tilt the wheel retainerplate down and through thecenter wheel.

Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside ofthe wheel.

3. Assemble the wheel wrench (7)to the hoist handle and theextension(s) (6).

4. Open the passenger siderear door.

Caution

Use of an air wrench or otherpower tools with the hoistmechanism is not recommended

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

and could damage the system.Use only the tools supplied withthe hoist mechanism.

5. Insert the chisel end of thehoist handle, on an angle,through the hole in the rearfloor panel above the bumperand onto the hoist shaft.

Do not use the chiseled end ofthe wheel wrench.

6. Raise the tire part way upward.Make sure the retainer isseated in the wheel opening.

7. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle byturning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you hear twoclicks or feel it skip twice. Youcannot overtighten the cable.

8. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull (1), andthen try to turn (2) the tire.If the tire moves, use the wheelwrench to tighten the cable.

Two clicks mean the tire is upall the way.

Repeat this tightness checkprocedure when checking thespare tire pressure accordingto the scheduled maintenanceinformation or any time thespare tire is handled due toservice of other components.


300 Vehicle Care

Correctly Stored Incorrectly Stored

9. Return the jacking equipmentto the proper location. Securethe items and replace the jackcover.

Full-Size Spare TireIf this vehicle came with a full-sizespare tire, it was fully inflated whennew, however, it can lose air overtime. Check the inflation pressureregularly.

See Tire Pressure 0 277 andVehicle Load Limits 0 172. Forinstructions on how to remove,install, or store a spare tire, see TireChanging 0 291.

After installing the spare tire on thevehicle, stop as soon as possibleand check that the spare is correctlyinflated. The spare tire is made toperform well at speeds up to112 km/h (70 mph) at therecommended inflation pressure, soyou can finish your trip.

Have the damaged or flat road tirerepaired or replaced back onto thevehicle, as soon as possible, so thespare tire will be available in case itis needed again.

Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep the spare tire and its wheeltogether.

If this vehicle has a spare tire thatdoes not match the original roadtires and wheels in size and type,do not include the spare in the tirerotation.


Vehicle Care 301

If equipped with a temporary usefull-size spare tire, it is indicated onthe tire sidewall. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 271. The spare tireshould not be driven on over112 km/h (70 mph), or 88 km/h(55 mph) when pulling a trailer, atthe proper inflation pressure. Repairand replace the road tire as soon asit is convenient, and stow the sparetire for future use.

Jump Starting

Jump Starting - NorthAmericaFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery - NorthAmerica 0 253.

If the vehicle battery has run down,you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer. WASH HANDS AFTER

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

HANDLING. For more informationgo to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See California Proposition65 Warning 0 229 and the backcover.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.


302 Vehicle Care

Caution

Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to the vehiclethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Trying to startthe vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damagethe vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle.It must have a 12-volt batterywith a negative ground system.

Caution

If the other vehicle does not havea 12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables canreach, but be sure the vehiclesare not touching each other.If they are, it could cause a

ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able tostart your vehicle, and the badgrounding could damage theelectrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parkingbrake.

Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible, turnoff or unplug all accessories oneither vehicle when jump starting.

3. Turn the ignition off on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into the

cigarette lighter or theaccessory power outlet. Turnoff the radio and all lamps thatare not needed. This will avoidsparks and help save bothbatteries. And it could save theradio!

4. Open the hoods and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations of the othervehicle.

On your van, use the unpaintedradio antenna bracket as aremote negative (−) terminal.

{ Warning

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it in

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 303

Warning (Continued)

your eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cablesdo not have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehiclescould be damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) willgo to positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to an unpainted metalpart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

On your van, use the unpaintedradio antenna bracket as aremote negative (−) terminal.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on thedead battery because this cancause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+)terminal of the dead battery.Use a remote positive (+)

terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

7. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.The other end of thenegative (−) cable does not goto the dead battery. It goes to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery. On your van, usethe unpainted radio antennabracket as a remotenegative (−) terminal.


304 Vehicle Care

8. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal locationon the vehicle with the deadbattery. On your van, use theunpainted radio antennabracket as a remotenegative (−) terminal.

Caution

The vehicle uses the unpaintedradio antenna bracket as aremote negative (-) terminal.Move the antenna coaxial cable

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

out of the way before clampingthe negative jumper cable to thefixed antenna bracket. Avoidtouching the negative cable clampto the air conditioning line. Failureto do either of these coulddamage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

9. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

10. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

vehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

After starting the disabled vehicleand removing the jumper cables,allow it to idle for several minutes.


Vehicle Care 305

Towing the Vehicle

Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not lashor hook to suspensioncomponents. Use the properstraps around the tires to securethe vehicle. Do not drag a lockedwheel/tire while loading thevehicle. Do not use a sling typelift to tow the vehicle. This coulddamage the vehicle.

GM recommends a flatbed tow truckto transport a disabled vehicle. Useramps to help reduce approachangles, if necessary. A towedvehicle should have its drive wheelsoff the ground. Contact RoadsideAssistance or a professional towingservice if the disabled vehicle mustbe towed.

Front Attachment Points

The vehicle is equipped withspecific attachment points to beused to pull the vehicle onto aflatbed car carrier from a flat roadsurface. Do not use theseattachment points to pull the vehiclefrom snow, mud or sand.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as behind a motorhome. The two most common types

of recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:

. Before towing the vehicle,become familiar with the locallaws that apply to recreationalvehicle towing. These laws mayvary by region.

. What is the towing capacity ofthe towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betraveled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.


306 Vehicle Care. Is the proper towing equipment

going to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Caution

Use of a shield mounted in frontof the vehicle grille could restrictairflow and cause damage to thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If using a shield, onlyuse one that attaches to thetowing vehicle.

Dinghy Towing

Caution

If the vehicle is towed with all fourwheels on the ground, thedrivetrain components could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not tow the vehiclewith all four wheels on theground.

The vehicle should not be towedwith all four wheels on the ground.

Dolly Towing

Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off theGround)

To tow the vehicle from the rear:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.See Parking Brake 0 191.

4. Put the transmission inP (Park).


Vehicle Care 307

5. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

6. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheelsare locked into the straightposition.

7. Turn the ignition to off.

If the tow vehicle will not bestarted or driven for six weeksor more, remove the batterycable from the negativeterminal (post) of the battery toprevent the battery fromdraining while towing.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 326.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Caution

Do not use petroleum-based,acidic, or abrasive cleaningagents as they can damage thevehicle's paint, metal, or plasticparts. If damage occurs, it wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

your dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, andappropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

Caution

Avoid using high-pressurewashes closer than 30 cm (12 in)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

Caution

Do not power wash anycomponent under the hood that

has thise symbol.

(Continued)


308 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

This could cause damage thatwould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If using an automatic car wash,follow the car wash instructions. Thewindshield wiper and rear windowwiper, if equipped, must be off.Remove any accessories that maybe damaged or interfere with the carwash equipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer to

have the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.


Vehicle Care 309

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum, chrome,or stainless steel. To preventdamage always follow thesecleaning instructions:

. Be sure the molding is cool tothe touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use only approved cleaningsolutions for aluminum, chrome,or stainless steel. Somecleaners are highly acidic orcontain alkaline substances andcan damage the moldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals, andStripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses,emblems, decals, and stripes.Follow instructions under "Washingthe Vehicle" previously in thissection.

Lamp covers are made of plastic,and some have a UV protectivecoating. Do not clean or wipe themwhile they are dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:

. Abrasive or caustic agents.

. Washer fluids and other cleaningagents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,or other harsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessiveheat generated.

Caution

Failure to clean lamps properlycan cause damage to the lampcover that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Using wax on low gloss blackfinish stripes can increase thegloss level and create anon-uniform finish. Clean lowgloss stripes with soap andwater only.

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshieldwhen washing the vehicle.


310 Vehicle Care

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply weatherstrip lubricant onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climatesmay require more frequentapplication. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfaces

can be removed by rubbing with aclean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 326.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Caution

Using petroleum-based tiredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Wheel Trim

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Caution

Chrome wheels and chromewheel trim may be damaged if thevehicle is not washed after drivingon roads that have been sprayedwith magnesium chloride orcalcium chloride. These are usedon roads for conditions such asdust and ice. Always wash thechrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Caution

To avoid surface damage onwheels and wheel trim, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners,or brushes. Use only GMapproved cleaners. Do not drivethe vehicle through an automaticcar wash that uses siliconecarbide tire/wheel cleaning

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 311

Caution (Continued)

brushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Brake System

Visually inspect brake lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect drumbrake linings/shoes for wear orcracks. Inspect all other brake parts.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wear atleast once a year.

Inspect power steering for properattachment, connections, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

Lubricate the upper and lowercontrol arm ball joints, at least everyother engine oil change.

Lubricate the tie rod ball joints, idlerarm pivot shaft bearings, idler armsocket, and pitman arm socket, atleast every other engine oil change.

Caution

Lubrication of applicable steering/suspension points should not bedone unless the temperature is−12 °C (10 °F) or higher,or damage could result.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thefuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, spring and fall,use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the fluid. Contaminatedfluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or axles andshould be replaced.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.


312 Vehicle Care

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface. See “Finish Care”previously in this section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils.Newspapers or dark garments cantransfer color to the vehicle’sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately remove

hand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Use cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces being cleaned toprevent permanent damage. Applyall cleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners on anyswitches or controls. Removecleaners quickly.

Before using cleaners, read andfollow all safety instructions on thelabel. While cleaning the interior,open the doors and windows to getproper ventilation.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:

. Never use a razor or any othersharp object to remove soil fromany interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with too muchpressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.8 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willcreate streaks and attract dirt.Do not use solutions that containstrong or caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.If necessary, use a commercialglass cleaner after cleaning withplain water.


Vehicle Care 313

Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six monthsof ownership will reduce tendencyto fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with waterand mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.

. When lightly soiled, wipe with asponge or soft, lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating vacuum brush attachment isbeing used, only use it on the floorcarpet. Before cleaning, gentlyremove as much of the soil aspossible:

. Gently blot liquids with a papertowel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean, lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth

to a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

After cleaning, use a paper towel toblot excess moisture.


314 Vehicle Care

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

Use a microfiber cloth on high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays. First,use a soft bristle brush to removedirt that can scratch the surface.Then gently clean by rubbing with amicrofiber cloth. Never use windowcleaners or solvents. Periodicallyhand wash the microfiber clothseparately, using mild soap. Do notuse bleach or fabric softener. Rinsethoroughly and air dry beforenext use.

Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,Low Gloss Paint Surfaces, andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, aswell as other interior surfaces,may cause permanent damage.Wipe excess moisture from thesesurfaces after cleaning and allowthem to dry naturally. Never useheat, steam, or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently change

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

the appearance and feel ofleather or soft trim, and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plasticsand painted surfaces. If an airfreshener comes in contact withany plastic or painted surface inthe vehicle, blot immediately andclean with a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.Damage caused by air freshenerswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.


Vehicle Care 315

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

If equipped, wash with warm waterand mild detergent. Do not usechlorine bleach. Rinse with coldwater, and then dry completely.

Care of Seat Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye seat beltwebbing. It may severely weakenthe webbing. In a crash, theymight not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean andrinse seat belt webbing only withmild soap and lukewarm water.Allow the webbing to dry.

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.

. The original equipment floormats were designed for thevehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.


316 Service and Maintenance

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 316

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 318

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . . . 329

General InformationThis maintenance section applies tovehicles with a gasoline engine. Fordiesel engine vehicles, see"Maintenance Schedule" in theDuramax diesel supplement.

Your vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

Do not have chemical flushes thatare not approved by GMperformed on the vehicle. Theuse of flushes, solvents, cleaners,or lubricants that are not

(Continued)


Service and Maintenance 317

Caution (Continued)

approved by GM could damagethe vehicle, requiring expensiverepairs that are not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services -Normal are for vehicles that:

. Carry passengers and cargowithin recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits0 172.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel 0 206.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services -Severe are for vehicles that are:

. Mainly driven in heavy city trafficin hot weather

. Mainly driven in hilly ormountainous terrain

. Frequently towing a trailer

. Used for high speed orcompetitive driving

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work 0 230.



MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop

. Check the engine oil level. SeeEngine Oil 0 235.

Once a Month

. Check the tire inflationpressures, including the spare.See Tire Pressure 0 277.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection 0 282.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid0 250.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system may notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor up to a year. The engine oil and

filter must be changed at least oncea year and the oil life system mustbe reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System 0 237.

Power Take Off (PTO) andExtended Idle Use

When the vehicle is used with thePTO equipment or used in a waythat requires extended idle time,one hour of use shall be deemedthe same as 53 km (33 mi). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 114 for hourmeter.

Air Conditioning Desiccant(Replace Every Seven Years)

The air conditioning system requiresmaintenance every seven years.This service requires replacement ofthe desiccant to help the longevityand efficient operation of the airconditioning system. This servicecan be complex. See your dealer.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation 0 282.

. Check engine oil level and oillife percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system.See Engine Oil 0 235 andEngine Oil Life System 0 237.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeCooling System 0 243.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid 0 250.

. Check tire inflation pressures,including the spare. See TirePressure 0 277.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection 0 282.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter0 242.


Service and Maintenance 319. Inspect brake system. See

Exterior Care 0 307.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damage,including cracks or tears in therubber boots, loose or missingparts, or signs of wear at leastonce a year. See Exterior Care0 307.

. Inspect power steering forproper attachment, connections,binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc.

. Visually inspect halfshafts anddrive shafts for excessive wear,lubricant leaks, and/or damageincluding: tube dents or cracks,constant velocity joint oruniversal joint looseness,cracked or missing boots, looseor missing boot clamps, centerbearing excessive looseness,loose or missing fasteners, andaxle seal leaks.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck 0 58.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care 0 307.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check 0 256.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check0 256.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck 0 256.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check0 257.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. If the holdopen is low, service the gasstrut. See Gas Strut(s) 0 258.

. Lubricate the steering linkage(greasable joints). See Normaland Severe MaintenanceSchedules. For severecommercial use vehicles, seeSpecial Application Services0 323.

. Visually inspect the spare tire toensure that it is tightly stowedunder the vehicle. Push, pull,and try to turn the tire. If thespare tire moves, tighten asnecessary. Verify that the wheelretainer plate compressionspring is fully compressed. SeeTire Changing 0 291.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.Lubricate the steering linkage.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (1) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (2) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (3) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (4) @

Replace brake fluid. (5)

Replace windshield wiper blades. (6) @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace hood and/or body lift support gas struts. @ @



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Normal

(1) Visually check all fuel and vaporlines and hoses for properattachment, connection, routing, andcondition.

(2) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(3) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 243.

(4) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(5) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 252.

(6) Or every 12 months, whichevercomes first. See Wiper BladeReplacement 0 257.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.Lubricate the steering linkage.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (1) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (2) @ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (3) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (4) @

Replace brake fluid. (5)

Replace windshield wiper blades. (6) @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace hood and/or body lift support gas struts. @ @



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Severe

(1) Visually check all fuel and vaporlines and hoses for properattachment, connection, routing, andcondition.

(2) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(3) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 243.

(4) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(5) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 252.

(6) Or every 12 months, whichevercomes first. See Wiper BladeReplacement 0 257.

Special ApplicationServices. Vehicles with Dual Wheels:

Check dual wheel nut torque at160, 1 600, and 10 000 km (100,1,000, and 6,000 mi) of driving.Repeat this service whenever atire/wheel is serviced orremoved.

. Severe Commercial UseVehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every oil change.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See “UnderbodyMaintenance” in Exterior Care0 307.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.

Battery

The 12-volt battery supplies powerto start the engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.


324 Service and Maintenance. To avoid break-down or failure to

start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts

. Belts may need replacing if theysqueak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.

. Signs of brake wear may includechirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 326 for GM approvedfluids.

. Engine oil and windshieldwasher fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.

. Signs that the headlamps needattention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.

. Signs of wear may includesteering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signs



of leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.

. Signs that the tires need to bereplaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care 0 312 andExterior Care 0 307.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.

. Signs that the alignment mayneed to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.

. Signs of damage includescratches, cracks, and chips.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.

. Signs of wear include streaking,skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsThis maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see themaintenance schedule section in the Duramax diesel supplement.

Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Automatic Transmission (6-SpeedTransmission)

DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission (8-SpeedTransmission)

DEXRON-HP Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Chassis Lubrication, Parking BrakeCable Guides

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Cooling System 0 243.

Engine Oil Engine oil meeting the dexos1 specification of the proper SAE viscositygrade. ACDelco dexos1 full synthetic is recommended. See Engine Oil0 235.

Front Wheel Bearings Wheel bearing lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category GC orGC-LB (GM Part No. 1051344, in Canada 993037).

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19353126, inCanada 19353127).



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Key Lock Cylinders, Hood Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 19329450, in Canada 19329451).

Rear Axle (Dual Rear Wheels) SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88900401, inCanada 89021678).

Rear Axle (Single Rear Wheels) SAE 75W-85 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 19300457, inCanada 19300458).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orequivalent.

Weatherstrip Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, inCanada 10953437).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.



Maintenance Replacement PartsIf the vehicle has the Duramax diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement.

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

4.3L V6 Engine 84065602 A3228C

6.0L V8 Engine 84000015 A3221C

Engine Oil Filter

4.3L V6 Engine 19330000 PF63E

6.0L V8 Engine 19303975 PF48E

Spark Plugs

4.3L V6 Engine 12622441 41-114

6.0L V8 Engine 12680072 41-110

Wiper Blades – 56.0 cm (22 in) 15214346 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


330 Technical Data

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 333

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe driver side of the vehicle. It canbe seen through the windshield fromoutside. The Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) also appears on theVehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacement

parts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specifications0 331 for the vehicle's engine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThere may be a label on the rearedge of the passenger side frontdoor that contains the followinginformation:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Model designation

. Paint information

. Production options and specialequipment

If there is no label, there is abarcode on the certification label onthe rear edge of the driver side frontdoor to scan for this sameinformation.


Technical Data 331

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsIf the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.

The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 326 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System without Rear Heat

4.3L V6 10.1 L 10.7 qt

6.0L V8 13.1 L 13.8 qt

Cooling System with Rear Heat

4.3L V6 12.4 L 13.1 qt

6.0L V8 16.1 L 17.0 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank

Cutaway (Optional Tank)* 215.7 L 57.0 gal


332 Technical Data

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Cutaway (Standard Tank) 124.9 L 33.0 gal

Passenger and Cargo 117.3 L 31.0 gal

* 4 039 mm (159 in) wheelbase or 4 496 mm (177 in) wheelbase only

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

4.3L V6 (LV1) P Automatic 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)

6.0L V8 (L96) G Automatic 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)

6.0L V8 (LC8) (Capable ofBeing Upfit for Gaseous Fuel)

B Automatic 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)


Technical Data 333

Engine Drive Belt Routing

4.3L V6 Engine (LV1)

6.0L V8 Engine (L96/LC8)

If equipped with a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.


334 Customer Information

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 337

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . 337GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 341Publication OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 346OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 347

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toGMC. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE : Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.

STEP TWO : If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot be


Customer Information 335

resolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-462-8782. In Canada, callGeneral Motors of CanadaCustomer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting GMC, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners :Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line Program toenforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.3033 Wilson Blvd.Suite 600Arlington, VA 22201

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100http://www.bbb.org/council/programs-services/dispute-handling-and-resolution/bbb-auto-line

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE — CanadianOwners : In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps One



and Two, General Motors of CanadaCompany wants you to be aware ofits participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of CanadaCompany has committed to bindingarbitration of owner disputesinvolving factory-related vehicleservice claims. The programprovides for the review of the factsinvolved by an impartial third partyarbiter, and may include an informalhearing before the arbiter. Theprogram is designed so that theentire dispute settlement process,from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should becompleted in about 70 days. Webelieve our impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of CanadaCompanyMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesGMC encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail GMC, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.gmc.com

1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782)1-888-889-2438 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-888-881-3302

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of CanadaCompanyCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gmc.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.



Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user in the U.S.can communicate with GMC bydialing: 1-888-889-2438. TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.gmc.com

The GMC online owner experienceis a one-stop resource that allowsinteraction with GMC and keepsimportant vehicle-specificinformation in one place.

Membership Benefits

E : Download owner’s manualsand view vehicle-specific how-tovideos.

G : View maintenance schedules,alerts, and Vehicle DiagnosticInformation. Schedule serviceappointments.

I : View and print dealer-recordedservice records and self-recordedservice records.

D : Select a dealer and viewlocations, maps, phone numbers,and hours.

r : Track your vehicle’s warrantyinformation.

J : View active recalls by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)0 330.

H : View GM Card, SiriusXMSatellite radio (if equipped), andOnStar account information (ifequipped).

F : Chat live with online helprepresentatives.

See my.gmc.com to register yourvehicle.

GMC Centre (Canada)www.gmcowner.ca

Take a trip to the GMC Centre:

. Chat live with online helprepresentatives.

. Use the Vehicle Tools section.

. Access third party enthusiastsites and social media networks.

. Locate resources such aslease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips, and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner’s manualfor your vehicle, quickly andeasily.

. Find the GMC-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.



GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement, up to certain limits,of eligible aftermarket adaptiveequipment required for the vehicle,such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift for thevehicle.

To learn about the GM Mobilityprogram, see www.gmmobility.comor call the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility program. See www.gm.caor call 1-800-GM-DRIVE(800-463-7483) for details. TTYusers call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-888-881-3302; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:

. Your name, home address, andhome telephone number

. Telephone number of yourlocation

. Location of the vehicle

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided for theduration of the vehicle's powertrainwarranty.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.General Motors North America andGMC reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

General Motors North America andGMC reserve the right to limitservices or payment to an owner ordriver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.


Customer Information 339. Lock-Out Service: Service to

unlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest GMC dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was in acrash and cannot be driven.Assistance is not given when thevehicle is stuck in the sand,mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warranty

event, incidental expenses maybe reimbursed within thePowertrain warranty period.Items considered are reasonableand customary hotel, meals,rental car, or a vehicle beingdelivered back to the customer,up to 500 miles.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws

. Legal fines

. Mounting, dismounting,or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices

Service is not provided if a vehicleis in an area that is not accessibleto the service vehicle or is not aregularly traveled or maintainedpublic road, which includes ice andwinter roads. Off-road use is notcovered.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is up to 7 L. Diesel fuel deliverymay be restricted. Propane andother fuels are not providedthrough this service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over150 km from where your trip wasstarted to qualify.Pre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders are required.Once authorization has beenreceived, the RoadsideAssistance advisor will help tomake arrangements and explainhow to receive payment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,



after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

The Courtesy Transportationprogram is no longer available forcutaway vehicles.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate booklet

entitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to do so, yourdealer may offer the followingtransportation options:

Shuttle Service

This includes one-way or round-tripshuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters ofyour dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If overnight warranty repairs areneeded, and public transportation isused, the expense must besupported by original receipts andwithin the maximum amount allowedby GM for shuttle service. If U.S.customers arrange their owntransportation, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuel



expenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

For an overnight warranty repair, thedealer may provide an availablecourtesy rental vehicle or provide forreimbursement of a rental vehicle.Reimbursement is limited and mustbe supported by original receipts aswell as a signed and completedrental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.Additional fees such as fuel usagecharges, taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usagebeyond the completion of the repairare also your responsibility.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Contact your dealerfor specific availability.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.



Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate-of-the-art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacement

parts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program0 338.

Gather the following information:

. Driver name, address, andtelephone number

. Driver license number

. Owner name, address, andtelephone number

. Vehicle license plate number


Customer Information 343. Vehicle make, model, and

model year

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Insurance company and policynumber

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? 0 65.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycled

original GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Publication OrderingInformation

Service Manuals

Service manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengine, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electricalsystem, steering system, body, etc.

Customer Literature

Owner’s manuals are writtenspecifically for owners and areintended to provide basicoperational information about thevehicle. The owner’s manualincludes the Maintenance Schedulefor all models.

Customer literature publicationsavailable for purchase includeowner’s manuals, warrantymanuals, infotainment manuals, andportfolios. Portfolios include anowner’s manual, warranty manual,infotainment manual, if applicable,and zip lock bag or pouch.



Current and Past Models

Service manuals and customerliterature are available for manycurrent and past model year GMvehicles.

To order, call 1-800-551-4123Monday–Friday, 8:00 a.m.–6:00 p.m.eastern time

For credit card orders only (VISA,MasterCard, or Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

To order by mail, write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Make checks payable in U.S. funds.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomplies with Part 15/Part 18 of theFederal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules and withInnovation, Science and EconomicDevelopment (ISED) Canada'sRSP-100 / license-exempt RSS's /ICES-001.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.



To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, and notifyGeneral Motors of CanadaCompany. Call TransportCanada at 1-800-333-0510;go to:

www.tc.gc.ca/recalls (English)

www.tc.gc.ca/rappels (French)

or write to:

Transport CanadaMotor Vehicle Safety DirectorateDefect Investigations andRecalls Division80 Noel StreetGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-GMC-8782(1-800-462-8782), or write:

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of CanadaCompanyCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7



Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:

. How various systems in yourvehicle were operating;

. Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur.

NoteEDR data are recorded by yourvehicle only if a non-trivial crashsituation occurs; no data arerecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) are recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.



GM will not access these data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStarIf the vehicle is equipped withOnStar and has an active serviceplan, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation;collisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to the

OnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

See OnStar Additional Information0 350.

Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system as part of theinfotainment system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the infotainment manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.


348 OnStar

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

OnStar Overview

= Voice Command Button

Q Blue OnStar Button

> Red Emergency Button

This vehicle may be equipped with acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to an OnStarAdvisor for Emergency, Security,Navigation, Connections, andDiagnostics Services. OnStarservices may require a paid serviceplan and data plan. OnStar requiresthe vehicle battery and electricalsystem, cellular service, and GPSsatellite signals to be available andoperating. OnStar acts as a link toexisting emergency serviceproviders. OnStar may collectinformation about you and yourvehicle, including locationinformation. See OnStar User

Terms, Privacy Statement, andSoftware Terms for more detailsincluding system limitations atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:

. Solid Green: System is ready.

. Flashing Green: On a call.

. Red: Indicates a problem.

. Off: System is off. Press Qtwice to speak with an OnStarAdvisor.

PressQ or call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton may vary by vehicle andregion.


OnStar 349

Press= to:

. Open the OnStar app on theinfotainment display. See theinfotainment manual forinformation on how to use theOnStar app.

Or

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.

. Obtain and customize the Wi-Fihotspot name or SSID andpassword, if equipped.

PressQ to connect to anAdvisor to:

. Verify account information orupdate contact information.

. Get driving directions.

. Receive a Diagnostic check ofthe vehicle's key operatingsystems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

. Manage Wi-Fi Settings,if equipped.

Press> to get a priority connectionto an OnStar Advisor available 24/7 to:

. Get help for an emergency.

. Be a Good Samaritan orrespond to an AMBER Alert.

. Get assistance in severeweather or other crisis situationsand find evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyEmergency Services require anactive safety and security plan. WithAutomatic Crash Response, built-insensors can automatically alert aspecially trained OnStar Advisorwho is immediately connected in tothe vehicle to help.

Press> for a priority connection toan OnStar Advisor who can contactemergency service providers, directthem to your exact location, andrelay important information.

With OnStar Crisis Assist, speciallytrained Advisors are available24 hours a day, 7 days a week, toprovide a central point of contact,assistance, and information during acrisis.

With Roadside Assistance, Advisorscan locate a nearby service providerto help with a flat tire, a batteryjump, or an empty gas tank.


350 OnStar

SecurityIf equipped, OnStar provides theseservices:

. With Stolen Vehicle Assistance,OnStar Advisors can use GPS topinpoint the vehicle and helpauthorities quickly recover it.

. With Remote Ignition Block,if equipped, OnStar can blockthe engine from being restarted.

. With Stolen Vehicle Slowdown,if equipped, OnStar can workwith law enforcement togradually slow the vehicle down.

Theft Alarm Notification

If equipped, if the doors are lockedand the vehicle alarm sounds, anotification by text, e-mail, or phonecall will be sent. If the vehicle isstolen, an OnStar Advisor can workwith authorities to recover thevehicle.

OnStar AdditionalInformationIn-Vehicle Audio Messages

Audio messages may play importantinformation at the following times:

. Prior to vehicle purchase.PressQ to set up an account.

. After change in ownership andat 90 days.

Transferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan cancel or change accountinformation.

Selling/Transferring theVehicle

Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) immediately toterminate your OnStar or connectedservices if the vehicle is disposedof, sold, transferred, or if thelease ends.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible. The Advisor will updatevehicle records and explain OnStaror connected service options.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, RemoteServices, Roadside Assistance, andHands-Free Calling are available onmost vehicles. Not all OnStarservices are available everywhereor on all vehicles. For moreinformation, a full description ofOnStar services, system limitations,and OnStar User Terms, PrivacyStatement, and Software Terms:

. Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).

. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).

. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.


OnStar 351

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.

OnStar or connected servicescannot work unless the vehicle is ina place where OnStar has anagreement with a wireless serviceprovider for service in that area. Thewireless service provider must alsohave coverage, network capacity,reception, and technologycompatible with OnStar orconnected services. Serviceinvolving location information aboutthe vehicle cannot work unless GPSsignals are available, unobstructed,and compatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar or connectedservices may not work if the OnStarequipment is not properly installedor it has not been properlymaintained. If equipment or softwareis added, connected, or modified,OnStar or connected services maynot work. Other problems beyondthe control of OnStar — such ashills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather,electrical system design andarchitecture of the vehicle, damage

to the vehicle in a crash, or wirelessphone network congestion orjamming — may prevent service.


Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpwith physical disabilities andmedical conditions.

PressQ to help:

. Locate a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Find a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Provide directions to the closesthospital or pharmacy in urgentsituations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicle

access to all OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

If equipped, TTY mode can beturned on or off by touchingSettings, then Apps, and thenPhone. When TTY mode is on,phone calls can be made orreceived with OnStar using theinfotainment display.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access someOnStar services. The PIN will needto be changed the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, contact anOnStar Advisor by pressingQ orcalling 1-888-4ONSTAR.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the vehiclewarranty.


352 OnStar

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages.PressQ and ask for an Advisor.Advisors are available in English,Spanish, and French. Availablelanguages may vary by country.

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleAssistance after the vehicle hasbeen off continuously for 10 dayswithout an ignition cycle. If thevehicle has not been started for10 days, OnStar can contactRoadside Assistance or a locksmithto help gain access to the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels andunderpasses; or in an area withvery dense trees. If GPS signalsare not available, the OnStarsystem should still operate to

call OnStar. However, OnStarcould have difficulty identifyingthe exact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

A temporary loss of GPS can causeloss of the ability to send aTurn-by-Turn Navigation route. TheAdvisor may give a verbal route ormay ask for a call back after thevehicle is driven into an open area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Cellular reception is required forOnStar to send remote signals tothe vehicle. Do not place items overor near the antenna to preventblocking cellular and GPS signalreception.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this message

may come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 227. Added electricalequipment may interfere with theoperation of the OnStar system andcause it to not operate.

Vehicle Software Updates

OnStar or GM may remotely deliversoftware updates or changes to thevehicle without further notice orconsent. These updates or changesmay enhance or maintain safety,


OnStar 353

security, or the operation of thevehicle or the vehicle systems.Software updates or changes mayaffect or erase data or settings thatare stored in the vehicle, such asOnStar Hands-Free Calling nametags, saved navigation destinations,or pre-set radio stations. NeitherOnStar nor GM is responsible forany affected or erased data orsettings. These updates or changesmay also collect personalinformation. Such collection isdescribed in the OnStar privacystatement or separately disclosed atthe time of installation. Theseupdates or changes may also causea system to automaticallycommunicate with GM servers tocollect information about vehiclesystem status, identify whetherupdates or changes are available,or deliver updates or changes. Anactive OnStar agreement constitutesconsent to these software updatesor changes and agreement thateither OnStar or GM may remotelydeliver them to the vehicle.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Werecommend that you review it. If youhave any questions, call1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)or pressQ to speak with anAdvisor. Users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third partiesmay unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - SoftwareAcknowledgements

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software and otherthird party software. Below are thenotices and licenses associated withlibcurl and unzip and for other thirdparty software please see http://opensource.lge.com/index

www.onstar.com/us/en/

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that theabove copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OR


354 OnStar

OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license. Thedefinitive version of this documentshould be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shallInfo-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,

and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binaryor disabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existingports with new graphicalinterfaces, and dynamic,


OnStar 355

shared, or static libraryversions–must be plainlymarked as such and must notbe misrepresented as beingthe original source. Suchaltered versions also must notbe misrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including,but not limited to, labeling ofthe altered versions with thenames “Info-ZIP” (or anyvariation thereof, including, butnot limited to, differentcapitalizations), “PocketUnZip,” “WiZ” or “MacZip”without the explicit permissionof Info-ZIP. Such alteredversions are further prohibitedfrom misrepresentative use ofthe Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its ownsource and binary releases.


356 Connected Services

ConnectedServices

Connected ServicesNavigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Connected Services

NavigationNavigation requires a specificOnStar or connected service plan.

PressQ to receive Turn-by-Turndirections or have them sent to thevehicle’s navigation screen,if equipped.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to anAdvisor.

2. Request directions to bedownloaded to the vehicle.

3. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton, if equipped, may vary byvehicle and region. For somevehicles, press= to open the

OnStar app on the infotainmentdisplay. For other vehicles press=as follows.

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

3. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview


2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat



Connected Services 357

2. Say “Repeat.” Systemresponds with the last directiongiven, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with theaddress and distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Send Destination to Vehicle

Directions can be sent to thevehicle’s navigation screen,if equipped.

PressQ, then ask the Advisor todownload directions to the vehicle’snavigation system, if equipped. Afterthe call ends, the navigation screenwill provide prompts to begin drivingdirections. Routes that are sent tothe navigation screen can only becanceled through the navigationsystem.

See www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsThe following services help withstaying connected.

For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

Ensuring Security

. Change the default passwordsfor the Wi-Fi hotspot andmyGMC mobile application.Make these passwords differentfrom each other and use acombination of letters, numbers,and symbols to increase thesecurity.

. Change the default name of theSSID (Service Set Identifier).This is your network’s name thatis visible to other wirelessdevices. Choose a unique nameand avoid family names orvehicle descriptions.

Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)

The vehicle may have a built-inWi-Fi hotspot that provides accessto the Internet and web content at4G LTE speed. Up to seven mobiledevices can be connected. A dataplan is required. Use the in-vehiclecontrols only when it is safe todo so.

1. To retrieve Wi-Fi hotspotinformation, press= to openthe OnStar app on theinfotainment display, thenselect Wi-Fi Hotspot. On somevehicles, touch Wi-Fi or Wi-FiSettings on the screen.

2. The Wi-Fi settings will displaythe Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID),password, and on somevehicles, the connection type(no Internet connection, 3G,4G, 4G LTE), and signal quality(poor, good, excellent).

3. To change the SSID orpassword, pressQ or call1-888-4ONSTAR to connectwith an Advisor. On some


358 Connected Services

vehicles, the SSID andpassword can be changed inthe Wi-Fi Hotspot menu.

After initial set-up, your vehicle’sWi-Fi hotspot will connectautomatically to your mobiledevices. Manage data usage byturning Wi-Fi on or off on yourmobile device, using the myGMCmobile app, or by contacting anOnStar Advisor. On some vehicles,Wi-Fi can also be managed from theWi-Fi Hotspot menu.

MyGMC Mobile App (If Available)

Download the myGMC mobile appto compatible Apple and Androidsmartphones. GMC users canaccess the following services from asmartphone:

. Remotely start/stop the vehicle,if factory-equipped.

. Lock/unlock doors, if equippedwith automatic locks.

. Activate the horn and lamps.

. Check the vehicle’s fuel level, oillife, or tire pressure,if factory-equipped with the TirePressure Monitor System.

. Send destinations to the vehicle.

. Locate the vehicle on a map(U.S. market only).

. Turn the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspoton/off, manage settings, andmonitor data consumption,if equipped.

. Locate a dealer and scheduleservice.

. Request roadside assistance.

. Set a parking reminder with pindrop, take a photo, make a note,and set a timer.

. Connect with GMC on socialmedia.

Features are subject to change. FormyGMC mobile app information andcompatibility, see my.gmc.com.

An active OnStar or connectedservice plan may be required.A compatible device,factory-installed remote start, and

power locks are required. Data ratesapply. See www.onstar.com fordetails and system limitations.

Remote Services

Contact an OnStar Advisor tounlock the doors or sound the hornand flash the lamps.

Marketplace

OnStar Advisors can provide offersfrom restaurants and retailers onyour route, help locate hotels,or book a room. These servicesvary by market.

OnStar Hands-Free Calling

Make and receive calls with thebuilt-in wireless calling service,which requires available minutes.Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton may vary by vehicle andregion. For some vehicles, press=to open the OnStar app on theinfotainment display, then selectHands-Free calling. For othervehicles press= as follows.


Connected Services 359

Make a Call

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK, calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency


2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing.System responds: “911.”

4. Say “Call.” System responds:“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is,”then says the number.

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

If equipped, press= and touchAccount Services to view thenumber of remaining minutes,available Wi-Fi data, and otheraccount information.

DiagnosticsBy monitoring and reporting on thevehicle's key systems, OnStarAdvanced Diagnostics, if equipped,provides a way to keep up onmaintenance. Capabilities vary bymodel. See www.onstar.com fordetails and system limitations.Features are subject to change. Forupdates on feature capabilities, seemy.gmc.com. Message and datarates may apply.


360 Index

Index AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . 227Additional InformationOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . 242Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . .159, 161Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . .62AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Light On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Airbags (cont'd)On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

AlertSide Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . . 202

All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138AntennaFixed Mast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . 190Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

AudioTheft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 133

Audio PlayersCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141


Index 361

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Transmission Fluid . . . . . . 238, 241

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Avoiding Untrusted MediaDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

BBatteryExterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Battery - North America . . . .253, 301Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . . 257BluetoothOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . . 109

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 176Bulb ReplacementCenter High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . 261

Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . 262Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96CaliforniaPerchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

CaliforniaProposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . .229, 253, 301,

Back CoverCameraRear Vision (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . 2Capacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

CargoTie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . . . 31Caution, Danger, and Warning . . . . 2CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . 107CheckEngine Light (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Ignition Transmission Lock . . . 256Child RestraintsInfants and Young Children . . . . .73


362 Index

Child Restraints (cont'd)Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 87Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 159Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . 161

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . 341CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Connected ServicesConnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

ConnectionsConnected Services . . . . . . . . . . 357

ControlTraction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38CoolantEngine Temperature Gauge . . 104

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159, 161Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 337Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Customer InformationPublications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . 341Danger, Warning, and Caution . . . . 2Data CollectionInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 347

Data Collection (cont'd)OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . 346Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32DevicesAuxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

DiagnosticsConnected Services . . . . . . . . . . 359

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129DoorCargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . .31Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . 333Driver Assistance Systems . . . . . 197Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210


Index 363

Driving (cont'd)Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167For Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . .23Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 170If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 172Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 168Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 172Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Dual TireRotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

EE85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Electrical SystemEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Floor Console Fuse Block . . . . 267Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 263Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

EmergencyOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Engine (cont'd)Check Light (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Compartment Overview . . . . . . . 232Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . 103Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Running While Parked . . . . . . . . 185Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Enhanced Technology Glass . . . . 41Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . 346Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 125

Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 126Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

FFanEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 128Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

FlexFuelE85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315FluidAutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . 238, 241

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Forward Collision Alert(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201


364 Index

Frequency StatementRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Front Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

FuelAdditives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . .113Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Top Tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 300FusesEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Floor Console Fuse Block . . . . 267Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 263

GGas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 103Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 316Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Glass, Enhanced Technology . . . . 41GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 128Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Headlamps (cont'd)Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . .113High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 126

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39HeaterEngine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159, 161High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 170Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . 192Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159, 161

IIdle SystemFast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37


Index 365

IndicatorVehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

InformationPublication Ordering . . . . . . . . . . 343

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . 347Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . 39Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

JJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

KKeyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . .27

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . 271LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . 127Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Lamps (cont'd)Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Malfunction Indicator(Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Lamps, Bulb Replacement . . . . . . 260Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Lane Departure WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Entry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . 129

LightsAirbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Lights (cont'd)Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Brake System Warning . . . . . . . 109Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Check Engine (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .112Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 126Lane Departure Warning . . . . . . .111Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . 105Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113StabiliTrak OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . .31Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32


366 Index

Locks (cont'd)Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 113Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Maintenance and CareAdditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . 318Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . 108Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40MediaAvoiding Untrusted Devices . . 141

MessagesEngine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

MirrorsConvex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . . . 39Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

NNavigationConnected Services . . . . . . . . . . 356

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . 176Noise Control System . . . . . . . . . . 254

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 237

Oil (cont'd)Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . 103Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . 72Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . 337OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

OnStar Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348OnStar Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350OnStar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151OperationInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 136

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 135

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191


Index 367

Parking (cont'd)Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 257

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . 184Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . . 230

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . 180Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . . . . 57PrivacyVehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . 346

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . . 340

Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Proposition65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . .229, 253, 301,

Back CoverPublication OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

RRadio Frequency Statement . . . . 344Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Rear Climate Control System . . . 161Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . 161Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . 198Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . 305Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . . . 71Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Replacing Seat Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . . . 345General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338


368 Index

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . . 333Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

SSafety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . . . 345General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . 340Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Replacing after a Crash . . . . . . . .59Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . .57

SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . .44Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Seats (cont'd)Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Securing Child Restraints . . . . 85, 87SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Climate Control System . . . . . . . 159Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . 230Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 329Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Parts Identification Label . . . . . 330Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 340

ServicesSpecial Application . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . 202

Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33SidemarkerBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Special Application Services . . . . 323Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Start Assist, Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . 29Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . 256Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Storage AreasFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . 91StrutsGas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Swing-out Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41


Index 369

SwitchesAirbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3SystemForward CollisionAlert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 347Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

SystemsDriver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

TTaillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . 337Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . 37Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Dual Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Tires (cont'd)Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Pressure Monitor Operation . . 279Pressure Monitor System . . . . . 278Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Terminology and Definitions . . 274Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 288When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Top Tier Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . 111TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . . 210Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222General Information . . . . . . . . . . 210Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 305Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . 225Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

TractionControl System(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . .112

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . 225Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . 238, 241

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

UUniform Tire Quality Grading . . . 287Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Identification Number (VIN) . . . 330Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172


370 Index

Vehicle (cont'd)Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . 111Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . . 109Caution and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . . 204

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

WarningsHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance . . 288

Wheels (cont'd)Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . 77Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Enhanced Technology Glass . . .41Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Swing-out Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

WindshieldReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . 257

SavanaOwner’s Manual

84144863 A

2019 Savana

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

19_GMC_Savana_COV_en_US_84144863A_2018JUN22.ai 1 6/14/2018 1:09:01 PM19_GMC_Savana_COV_en_US_84144863A_2018JUN22.ai 1 6/14/2018 1:09:01 PM

2019 savana - my.gmc.com · gmc savana owner manual (gmna-localizing-u.s./canada-12146167) - 2019 -...

Documents